1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
190 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
194 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
216 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
220 \begin_inset Note Note
223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
224 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
225 \begin_inset Newline newline
230 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
238 \begin_layout Standard
239 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
240 LatexCommand tableofcontents
247 \begin_layout Chapter
251 \begin_layout Section
252 What is \SpecialChar LyX
256 \begin_layout Standard
258 is a document preparation system.
259 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
260 scripts, publishable books, business
261 letters and proposals,
262 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
266 It is unlike most other
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
274 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
276 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
292 pt type, left justified, 5
293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
312 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
316 \begin_layout Standard
321 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
322 's philosophy: most importantly,
323 the format of all of the manuals.
324 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
325 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
326 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
329 \begin_layout Section
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
336 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
338 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
339 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
345 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
346 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
348 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
349 only a vertical scrollbar.
352 \begin_layout Standard
353 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
354 The first case is large images.
355 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
356 the image and use the option
367 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
370 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
373 \begin_layout Standard
374 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
375 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
383 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
390 \begin_layout Section
394 \begin_layout Standard
395 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
397 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
399 Just select the manual you want to read from the
406 \begin_layout Section
407 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
411 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
418 \begin_layout Standard
419 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
420 can be configured via the menu
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
440 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
441 packages are available.
442 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
444 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
445 was installed on your system,
446 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
451 \begin_inset space \space{}
454 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
455 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
457 To force \SpecialChar LyX
458 to re-inspect your system use
460 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
464 \begin_inset Index idx
469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
470 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
476 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
477 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
480 \begin_layout Section
483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
485 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
492 \begin_layout Standard
493 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
494 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
495 installed but you will not be
497 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
498 or print your documents
502 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
503 Some \SpecialChar LyX
504 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
513 which can produce PDFs and the like.
516 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
521 every \SpecialChar LyX
522 document can still be output as plain text
523 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
529 \begin_layout Standard
530 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
536 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
537 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
540 \begin_layout Standard
541 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
542 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
543 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
546 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
554 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
555 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
558 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
562 \begin_inset Index idx
567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
568 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
576 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
583 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
587 \begin_layout Chapter
588 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
592 \begin_layout Section
593 Basic File Operations
594 \begin_inset Index idx
599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
608 \begin_layout Standard
613 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
614 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
617 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
655 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
661 \begin_layout Itemize
683 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
695 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
709 \begin_layout Itemize
721 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
725 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
735 \begin_layout Itemize
757 \begin_layout Itemize
769 arg "buffer-write-as"
773 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
777 \begin_layout Itemize
779 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
791 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
795 \begin_layout Itemize
797 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
805 \begin_layout Itemize
819 \begin_layout Itemize
833 \begin_layout Standard
834 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
835 few minor differences.
838 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
849 command lists the available templates.
850 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
851 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
852 and possibly propose text fragments
854 for the document, features
855 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
858 you would otherwise need to
859 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
865 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
869 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
877 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
884 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
888 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
896 \begin_layout Standard
897 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
929 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
930 to open a file or create a new one, that big
931 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
935 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
939 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
950 \begin_layout Standard
972 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
974 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
977 people work on the same document at the same time.
981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
982 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
985 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
990 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
991 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
993 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
995 \begin_inset Flex Emph
998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1001 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1010 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1023 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1034 \begin_inset space ~
1038 \begin_inset space ~
1043 will reload the document from disk.
1044 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1045 and want to restore it to the last save
1046 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1053 \begin_inset space ~
1058 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1059 them as your changes.
1062 \begin_layout Section
1063 Basic Editing Features
1064 \begin_inset Index idx
1069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1078 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1085 \begin_layout Standard
1086 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1087 can perform cut and paste operations
1088 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1089 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1090 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1091 editing features and how to access
1093 We will start with cut and paste.
1096 \begin_layout Standard
1097 As you might expect, the
1101 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1102 various other editing features.
1103 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1107 \begin_layout Itemize
1113 \begin_inset Index idx
1118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 \begin_layout Itemize
1153 \begin_inset Index idx
1158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 \begin_layout Itemize
1193 \begin_inset Index idx
1198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1223 \begin_layout Itemize
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1233 \begin_layout Itemize
1237 \begin_inset space ~
1243 \begin_layout Itemize
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset Index idx
1262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 \begin_inset Index idx
1276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1291 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1301 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1307 \begin_layout Standard
1308 The first three are self-explanatory.
1309 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1310 and other programs using
1331 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1332 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1337 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1338 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1339 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1340 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1341 into individual cells.
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1350 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1351 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1355 \begin_layout Standard
1359 \begin_inset space ~
1364 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1366 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1381 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1382 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1383 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1392 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1393 text which is often meaningless.)
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1400 \begin_inset space ~
1403 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1405 \begin_inset space ~
1409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1413 \begin_inset space ~
1422 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1423 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1424 is inserted as one paragraph.
1425 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1429 \begin_inset space ~
1434 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1435 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1441 \begin_inset space ~
1444 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1458 \begin_inset space ~
1461 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1464 paste from the primary selection.
1465 This is normally the currently selected text.
1468 \begin_layout Standard
1471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1473 \begin_inset space ~
1477 \begin_inset space ~
1485 \begin_inset space ~
1489 \begin_inset space ~
1495 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1497 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1501 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1504 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1509 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1512 \begin_inset space ~
1523 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1525 \begin_inset space ~
1529 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1531 \begin_inset space ~
1539 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1553 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1557 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1561 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1565 \begin_inset space ~
1577 arg "word-find-backward"
1580 shortcut) to search backwards
1584 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1585 Even if you close the widget,
1594 arg "word-find-backward"
1597 will search further.
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1609 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1612 \begin_inset space ~
1617 field and searches the next match.
1623 \begin_inset space ~
1628 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1630 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1632 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1636 \begin_layout Standard
1638 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1639 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1642 \begin_layout Itemize
1645 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1651 \begin_inset space ~
1657 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1660 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1661 If the toggle is set, searching for
1662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1673 will not match the word
1674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1687 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1698 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1702 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1707 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1708 to only find complete words, e.
1709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1713 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1742 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1746 \begin_layout Itemize
1749 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1754 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1760 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1765 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1777 \begin_layout Itemize
1779 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1784 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1785 been reached without asking.
1786 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1787 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1788 so you need to put it back manually.
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1792 \paragraph_spacing single
1794 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1795 The widget also has a
1799 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1800 widget), hiding replace and options.
1802 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1804 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1809 button brings you back to the full size.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 \paragraph_spacing single
1816 also offers an advanced
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1823 \begin_inset space ~
1828 feature that is described in section
1829 \begin_inset space ~
1833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1835 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1842 \begin_layout Standard
1843 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1844 \begin_inset space \space{}
1848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1856 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1858 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1863 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1870 \begin_layout Standard
1874 arg "inset-select-all"
1877 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1878 When the cursor is inside an inset
1881 arg "inset-select-all"
1884 selects the content of the inset.
1888 arg "inset-select-all"
1891 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1892 then to the whole document.
1896 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1899 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1903 \begin_layout Section
1905 \begin_inset Index idx
1910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1931 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1938 \begin_layout Standard
1939 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1941 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1947 or the toolbar button
1954 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1959 or the toolbar button
1966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1973 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1982 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1983 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1992 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1993 This is a consequence of the 100
1994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1997 step undo limit mentioned above.
2000 \begin_layout Standard
2009 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2011 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
2015 \begin_layout Section
2017 \begin_inset Index idx
2022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2031 \begin_layout Standard
2032 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2035 \begin_layout Enumerate
2040 \begin_layout Itemize
2045 once anywhere in the edit window.
2046 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2050 \begin_layout Enumerate
2055 \begin_layout Itemize
2062 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2065 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2068 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2069 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2071 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2072 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2078 \begin_layout Itemize
2079 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2089 \begin_layout Enumerate
2090 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2094 \begin_layout Standard
2095 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2096 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2100 \begin_layout Section
2102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2104 name "sec:Navigating"
2109 \begin_inset Index idx
2114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2123 \begin_layout Standard
2125 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2128 \begin_layout Itemize
2133 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2134 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2137 \begin_layout Itemize
2138 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2140 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2142 \begin_inset space ~
2147 or by the toolbar button
2150 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2156 \begin_layout Itemize
2157 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2159 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2162 and use the same menu to return to them.
2163 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2166 \begin_layout Standard
2170 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2175 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2176 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2178 \begin_inset space ~
2183 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2184 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2185 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2186 last editing position.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2194 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2198 \begin_layout Subsection
2200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2202 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2207 \begin_inset Index idx
2212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2229 \begin_inset Index idx
2234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2243 \begin_layout Standard
2244 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2245 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2246 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2247 \begin_inset space ~
2251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2253 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2257 ), notes, or citations (see section
2258 \begin_inset space ~
2262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2264 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2269 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2274 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2275 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2276 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2277 dialog and to modify the citation.
2280 \begin_layout Standard
2285 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2286 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2288 Labels and References
2290 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2299 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2302 \begin_layout Standard
2303 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2304 control the display.
2309 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2310 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2315 option keeps it in the current view state.
2316 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2320 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2321 \begin_inset space ~
2324 3, the subsections of sections
2325 \begin_inset space ~
2328 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2333 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2334 \begin_inset space ~
2338 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2348 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2351 \begin_layout Standard
2358 button refreshes the TOC (
2359 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2361 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2365 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2367 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2371 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2375 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2379 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2383 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2385 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2389 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2391 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2395 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2397 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2401 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2405 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2407 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2411 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2415 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2419 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2423 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2427 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2431 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2435 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2439 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2441 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2445 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2459 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2460 For example, you can move section
2461 \begin_inset space ~
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2468 2.4 or after section
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2474 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2487 (or the corresponding key bindings
2495 ) you can change the level of sections.
2496 You can make section
2497 \begin_inset space ~
2501 \begin_inset space ~
2505 \begin_inset space ~
2511 \begin_layout Standard
2512 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2513 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2516 \begin_layout Subsection
2517 Horizontal Scrolling
2518 \begin_inset Index idx
2523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2525 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2535 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2554 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2559 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2560 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2561 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2570 \begin_layout Itemize
2572 is used on a small tablet computer
2575 \begin_layout Itemize
2576 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2588 \begin_inset space ~
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2602 Math constructs with long command names
2605 \begin_layout Standard
2606 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2607 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2609 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2610 window so that table
2611 \begin_inset space ~
2615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2617 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2622 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2624 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2625 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2628 \begin_layout Standard
2629 \begin_inset Float table
2636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2642 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2646 Horizontal scrolling test.
2654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Tabular
2657 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2658 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2660 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2703 \begin_layout Section
2704 Input/Word Completion
2705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2707 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2712 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 \begin_inset Index idx
2729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2760 \begin_layout Standard
2762 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2764 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2765 is used to propose completions.
2768 \begin_layout Standard
2769 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2772 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2777 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2784 \begin_inset space ~
2788 \begin_inset space ~
2793 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2797 \begin_inset space ~
2802 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2803 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2807 \begin_inset space ~
2813 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2814 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2815 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2816 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2819 \begin_layout Standard
2821 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2822 completions available.
2827 key to accept a proposed completion.
2828 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2829 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2830 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2833 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2840 \begin_layout Standard
2841 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2842 ing options for text.
2844 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2846 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2848 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2851 he special math option
2855 enables characters to be composed.
2857 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2859 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2863 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2866 you want to insert the character
2867 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2871 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2874 input the characters
2875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2887 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2889 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2893 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2895 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2900 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2902 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2905 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2910 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2913 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2918 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2920 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2924 's installation folder.
2926 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2927 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2934 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2939 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2940 In the example above,
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 \begin_layout Section
2979 \begin_inset Index idx
2984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2991 \begin_inset Index idx
2996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2998 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3013 \begin_inset Index idx
3018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3020 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3037 \begin_layout Standard
3038 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3052 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3055 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3059 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3060 \begin_inset space ~
3064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3066 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3073 \begin_layout Standard
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3085 \begin_inset space ~
3106 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3110 \begin_layout Labeling
3111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3115 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3116 LatexCommand nomenclature
3118 description "Tabulator key"
3125 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3127 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3128 \begin_inset space ~
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3134 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3141 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3145 , especially section
3146 \begin_inset space ~
3150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3152 reference "subsec:Lists"
3158 If you are still confused, look in the
3163 \begin_inset Newline newline
3171 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3172 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3176 \begin_layout Labeling
3177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3181 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3182 LatexCommand nomenclature
3184 description "Escape key"
3192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3199 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3200 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3203 \begin_layout Labeling
3204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3209 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3210 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3214 \begin_layout Standard
3215 There are three modifier keys:
3218 \begin_layout Labeling
3219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3237 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3238 LatexCommand nomenclature
3240 description "Control key"
3245 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3246 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3250 \begin_layout Itemize
3259 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3262 \begin_layout Itemize
3271 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3274 \begin_layout Itemize
3283 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3287 \begin_layout Labeling
3288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3306 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3307 LatexCommand nomenclature
3309 description "Shift key"
3314 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3315 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3318 \begin_layout Labeling
3319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3338 LatexCommand nomenclature
3340 description "Alt or Meta key"
3345 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3346 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3347 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3353 \begin_inset Newline newline
3356 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3358 menu accelerator keys
3361 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3362 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 For example, the sequence
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset space ~
3378 \begin_inset space ~
3384 \begin_inset space ~
3392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3411 \begin_inset space ~
3417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3427 \begin_layout Standard
3432 manual lists all other things bound to the
3440 \begin_layout Standard
3441 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3443 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3445 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3446 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3448 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3449 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3450 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3452 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3468 followed by a capital
3475 \begin_layout Chapter
3478 \begin_inset Index idx
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3486 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 \begin_layout Section
3505 \begin_inset Index idx
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3529 \begin_layout Subsection
3533 \begin_layout Standard
3534 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3535 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3536 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3537 numbering schemes, and so on.
3538 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3539 and format the title of your document differently.
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3547 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3548 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3549 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3550 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3551 picks one for you by default.
3552 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3555 \begin_layout Subsection
3557 \begin_inset Index idx
3562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3581 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3588 \begin_layout Standard
3589 You can select a class using the
3591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3596 \begin_inset Index idx
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3626 \begin_layout Standard
3627 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3632 \begin_layout Description
3633 Article for basic articles
3636 \begin_layout Description
3637 Report for basic reports
3640 \begin_layout Description
3641 Book for writing a book
3644 \begin_layout Description
3645 Letter for US-style letters
3648 \begin_layout Standard
3649 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3650 only uses if you have installed
3651 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3652 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3653 distributions will include
3655 Here are some of the classes.
3656 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3658 Special Document Classes
3667 \begin_layout Description
3668 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3671 \begin_layout Description
3672 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3676 \begin_layout Description
3677 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3683 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3684 There are three article layouts available.
3685 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3686 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3687 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3688 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3693 sequential numbering
3694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3697 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3698 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3699 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3700 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3703 \begin_layout Description
3704 Beamer Layout for presentations
3707 \begin_layout Description
3708 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3709 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3710 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3711 with \SpecialChar LyX
3715 \begin_layout Description
3716 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3719 \begin_layout Description
3721 \begin_inset space ~
3724 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3727 \begin_layout Description
3728 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3731 \begin_layout Description
3732 Foils Used to make transparencies
3735 \begin_layout Description
3736 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3737 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3738 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3739 with \SpecialChar LyX
3743 \begin_layout Description
3744 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3745 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3748 \begin_layout Description
3749 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3752 \begin_layout Description
3753 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3756 \begin_layout Description
3757 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3758 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3759 (Is used by this document.)
3762 \begin_layout Description
3763 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3766 \begin_layout Description
3767 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3770 \begin_layout Description
3775 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3776 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3778 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3782 \begin_layout Description
3783 Slides Used to make transparencies
3786 \begin_layout Description
3788 \begin_inset space ~
3791 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3792 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3795 \begin_layout Description
3796 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3802 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3804 Special Document Classes
3811 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3812 of the document classes.
3815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3819 \begin_layout Standard
3820 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3822 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3823 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3827 \begin_inset Index idx
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3834 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3857 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3858 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3860 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3863 \begin_layout Standard
3866 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3871 , are highly specialized.
3873 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3874 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3875 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3876 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3877 by some document class.
3878 There are just too many of them.
3879 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3882 \begin_layout Standard
3883 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3891 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3892 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3893 document class for a new file.
3895 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3898 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 manual for information on how to install them.
3906 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3912 \begin_layout Standard
3913 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3914 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3915 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3916 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3917 class files to be used for dissertation
3918 s submitted to those universities.
3919 The \SpecialChar LyX
3920 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3922 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3926 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3932 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3939 name "subsec:Modules"
3944 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 \begin_layout Standard
3969 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3970 chosen document class.
3971 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3972 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3983 \begin_inset Index idx
3988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4005 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
4009 \begin_layout Standard
4010 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4011 packages or file format converters that are not always
4012 installed by default.
4014 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
4015 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4016 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
4017 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
4019 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4020 file without the missing prerequisites.
4021 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
4022 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4029 \begin_inset Index idx
4034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4035 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4042 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4046 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4050 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4059 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4061 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4072 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4075 \begin_layout Standard
4076 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4086 will advise you about these things.
4094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4098 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4103 \begin_inset Index idx
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4110 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4127 \begin_layout Standard
4128 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4129 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4130 : They are intended to be used in
4131 a variety of different documents.
4132 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
4133 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4134 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
4135 need a specific inset or
4136 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4138 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4141 style only that one time.
4142 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4144 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4162 manual for information on how to use it.
4165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4169 \begin_layout Standard
4170 Each class has a default set of options.
4171 Here's a quick table describing them:
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4181 \begin_layout Standard
4183 \begin_inset Tabular
4184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4645 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4651 \begin_layout Standard
4652 You're probably also wondering what
4653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4657 \begin_inset space ~
4661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4665 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4666 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4671 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4676 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4686 headings, there are also
4694 headings, and so on.
4695 We will describe these headings fully in section
4696 \begin_inset space ~
4700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4702 reference "subsec:Headings"
4709 \begin_layout Subsection
4711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4713 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4718 \begin_inset Index idx
4723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4725 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4740 \begin_inset Index idx
4745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4747 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4774 \begin_inset space ~
4782 \begin_inset space ~
4787 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4789 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4790 doesn't support special options you want to
4791 use for your document.
4792 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4793 -class and its options, you have to read
4797 \begin_layout Standard
4799 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4803 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4807 \begin_inset space ~
4814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4820 \begin_inset space ~
4825 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4826 You can choose between the following five options:
4829 \begin_layout Labeling
4830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4835 Use default page style of current class.
4838 \begin_layout Labeling
4839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4844 No page numbers or headings.
4847 \begin_layout Labeling
4848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4856 \begin_layout Labeling
4857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4862 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4863 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4864 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4865 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4868 \begin_layout Labeling
4869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4874 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4875 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4881 \begin_inset Index idx
4886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4889 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4904 How they are defined is explained in section
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4911 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4920 \begin_inset space ~
4924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4926 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4933 \begin_layout Subsection
4934 Paper Size and Orientation
4935 \begin_inset Index idx
4940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4966 \begin_layout Standard
4967 You can find the following options in the menu
4970 \begin_inset space ~
4977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4981 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5005 \begin_layout Labeling
5006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5010 \begin_inset space ~
5015 What size paper to print on.
5020 \begin_layout Itemize
5026 \begin_layout Itemize
5032 \begin_layout Itemize
5038 \begin_layout Itemize
5044 \begin_layout Itemize
5047 US letter, US legal, US executive
5050 \begin_layout Itemize
5056 \begin_layout Itemize
5063 \begin_layout Labeling
5064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5069 To choose whether to output as
5080 \begin_layout Labeling
5081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5085 \begin_inset space ~
5090 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5091 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5094 \begin_layout Subsection
5096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5098 name "subsec:Margins"
5103 \begin_inset Index idx
5108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5110 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5125 \begin_inset Index idx
5130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 Paper margins are set in the menu
5142 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5146 \begin_inset Index idx
5151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5153 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5170 \begin_layout Standard
5171 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
5172 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
5173 the paper format and the font size into account.
5176 \begin_layout Subsection
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5181 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
5182 has to convert everything into the new
5184 That includes the paragraph environments.
5185 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
5186 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5187 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
5189 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5198 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
5200 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
5201 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
5202 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
5205 \begin_layout Section
5206 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5207 \begin_inset Index idx
5212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5231 \begin_layout Subsection
5233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5235 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5242 \begin_layout Standard
5243 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
5244 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5247 \begin_layout Standard
5248 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5249 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5250 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5251 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5255 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5261 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5262 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5263 language than English.
5265 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5269 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5270 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5271 into \SpecialChar LyX
5273 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5276 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5278 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5279 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5280 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5288 goes to produce a printable file.
5293 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5295 gives you the ability globally to change
5299 these pre-coded spacings.
5300 We will explain more later.
5303 \begin_layout Subsection
5304 Paragraph Separation
5305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5307 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5312 \begin_inset Index idx
5317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5344 \begin_inset space ~
5352 \begin_inset space ~
5359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 \begin_inset Index idx
5368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5370 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5384 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5387 \begin_layout Subsection
5391 \begin_layout Standard
5392 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5395 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5397 \begin_inset space ~
5402 dialog and toggle the
5405 \begin_inset space ~
5410 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5413 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5417 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5418 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5422 \begin_layout Standard
5423 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5424 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5427 \begin_layout Subsection
5429 \begin_inset Index idx
5434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5436 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5453 \begin_layout Standard
5456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5467 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5481 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5485 \begin_inset space ~
5494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5495 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5501 \begin_inset Index idx
5506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5509 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5523 installed to use this feature.
5528 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5532 \begin_inset space ~
5537 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5538 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5541 \begin_layout Section
5542 Paragraph Environments
5543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5545 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5550 \begin_inset Index idx
5555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5557 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset Index idx
5577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5578 Paragraph environments
5586 \begin_layout Subsection
5590 \begin_layout Standard
5591 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5594 \begin_layout Standard
5603 } \SpecialChar ldots
5613 \begin_inset Newline newline
5616 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5618 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5619 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5620 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5629 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5632 \begin_layout Standard
5633 A paragraph environment is simply a
5634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5641 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5642 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5643 scheme, labels, and so on.
5644 Additionally, you can
5645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5652 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5653 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5654 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5655 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5657 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5659 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5662 \begin_layout Standard
5663 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5664 \begin_inset Graphics
5665 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5671 at the left end of the toolbar.
5673 will change the environment of the
5677 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5678 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5679 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5682 \begin_layout Standard
5691 create a new paragraph using the
5695 paragraph environment.
5697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5704 because if you are in one of these environments:
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 \begin_layout Itemize
5731 \begin_layout Itemize
5737 \begin_layout Itemize
5743 \begin_layout Itemize
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5751 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5755 , rather than resetting it to
5760 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5761 \begin_inset space ~
5765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5767 reference "sec:Nesting"
5774 \begin_layout Subsection
5778 \begin_layout Standard
5779 The default paragraph environment is
5784 It creates a plain paragraph.
5786 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5787 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5788 this manual) are in the
5795 \begin_layout Standard
5796 You can nest a paragraph using the
5800 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5808 \begin_layout Subsection
5810 \begin_inset Index idx
5815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5835 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5836 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5845 for thanks or contact information.
5846 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5847 places all of this on a separate page
5848 along with today's date.
5849 For other types of documents, the title
5850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5857 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5860 \begin_layout Standard
5862 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5876 Here's how you use them:
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 Put the title of your document in the
5887 \begin_layout Itemize
5888 Put the author name in the
5895 \begin_layout Itemize
5896 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5897 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5903 Note that using this environment is optional.
5904 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5905 will automatically insert today's date.
5906 If you don't want a date, use the option
5908 Suppress default date on front page
5912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5913 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5915 \begin_inset space ~
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5924 You can use footnotes to insert
5925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5932 or contact information.
5935 \begin_layout Subsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5951 name "subsec:Headings"
5958 \begin_layout Standard
5959 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5961 takes care of the numbering for you.
5964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5966 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5973 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5990 \begin_layout Standard
5991 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6001 \begin_layout Enumerate
6007 \begin_layout Enumerate
6013 \begin_layout Enumerate
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6025 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 \begin_layout Standard
6039 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
6040 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6041 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
6042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6044 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6046 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6052 \begin_layout Standard
6053 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6054 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
6055 You group the book into chapters.
6057 does a similar grouping:
6060 \begin_layout Itemize
6065 is divided into either
6076 \begin_layout Itemize
6088 \begin_layout Itemize
6100 \begin_layout Itemize
6112 \begin_layout Itemize
6124 \begin_layout Itemize
6136 \begin_layout Standard
6137 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6145 Not all document types use the
6149 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6154 is the top-level heading.
6162 \begin_layout Standard
6167 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
6168 labels it with its number,
6169 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
6171 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
6173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6185 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6210 The unnumbered section headings have a
6211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6218 at the end of their name.
6219 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
6220 the table of contents, see section
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6235 Changing the Numbering
6236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6238 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6245 \begin_layout Standard
6246 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
6247 in the Table of Contents.
6248 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
6250 Just as certain classes start with
6264 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6274 This is something you can change.
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6284 \begin_inset Index idx
6289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6291 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6308 \begin_inset space ~
6312 \begin_inset space ~
6317 you will see two counters.
6322 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6323 numbers a section heading.
6324 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
6328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6329 Short Titles of Headings
6330 \begin_inset Index idx
6335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6352 \begin_inset Argument 1
6355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6364 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6372 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
6373 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6374 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
6375 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6378 \begin_layout Standard
6380 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6381 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6382 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6383 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6394 This will insert a box labeled
6395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6399 \begin_inset space ~
6403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6406 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6407 This also works for captions inside floats.
6408 There can only be one short title per title.
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6412 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6419 \begin_layout Standard
6420 The following information applies to all section headings:
6423 \begin_layout Itemize
6424 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6427 \begin_layout Itemize
6428 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6431 \begin_layout Itemize
6432 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6435 \begin_layout Itemize
6436 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6439 \begin_layout Subsection
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6445 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6459 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6460 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6461 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6462 the text they contain.
6463 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6471 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6474 \begin_layout Standard
6475 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6484 when you start a new paragraph.
6485 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6489 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6490 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6491 have to change back to the
6495 environment yourself.
6498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6521 \begin_layout Standard
6522 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6523 time for the differences.
6532 are identical except for one difference:
6536 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6545 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6549 Here's an example of the
6562 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6564 See – no indentation!
6568 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6569 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6570 the other paragraph.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Here's another example, this time in the
6581 \begin_layout Quotation
6587 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6588 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6589 the first line, then
6593 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6597 you were quoting other text.
6600 \begin_layout Quotation
6601 Here's a new paragraph.
6602 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6603 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6606 \begin_layout Standard
6607 As the examples show,
6611 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6612 They should put quotes in the
6617 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6621 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6633 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6669 \begin_layout Standard
6674 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6680 \begin_inset Newline newline
6683 Which I did not rehearse!
6687 It could be much worse.
6688 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6690 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6691 indented a bit more than the first.
6692 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6698 \begin_inset Newline newline
6701 And make things look fine
6702 \begin_inset Newline newline
6708 arg "newline-insert newline"
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6719 does not indent both margins.
6720 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6721 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6724 arg "newline-insert newline"
6730 \begin_layout Subsection
6732 \begin_inset Index idx
6737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6753 \begin_layout Standard
6755 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6765 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6766 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6775 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6776 lets you provide your own label.
6777 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6778 describing some general features of all four of them.
6781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6785 \begin_layout Standard
6786 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6788 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6789 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6798 reset the environment to
6802 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6803 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6804 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6808 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6812 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6821 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6822 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6824 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6825 you read all of section
6826 \begin_inset space ~
6830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6832 reference "sec:Nesting"
6839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6841 \begin_inset Index idx
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6877 paragraph environment.
6878 It has the following properties:
6881 \begin_layout Itemize
6882 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6886 \begin_layout Itemize
6888 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6891 \begin_layout Itemize
6892 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6896 \begin_layout Itemize
6897 The items can have any length.
6899 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6900 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6907 \begin_layout Itemize
6912 environment inside another
6916 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6926 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6929 \begin_layout Itemize
6931 \begin_inset space ~
6935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6937 reference "sec:Nesting"
6941 for a full explanation of nesting.
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6955 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6960 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6963 \begin_layout Itemize
6964 The label for the first level
6968 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6973 The label for the second level is a dash.
6977 \begin_layout Itemize
6978 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6982 \begin_layout Itemize
6983 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6987 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 Back out to the third level.
6992 \begin_layout Itemize
6993 Back to the second level.
6997 \begin_layout Itemize
6998 Back to the outermost level.
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7002 These are the default labels for an
7007 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7012 dialog in the submenu
7017 \begin_inset Index idx
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7042 \begin_layout Standard
7043 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7044 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
7046 \begin_inset space ~
7050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7052 reference "sec:Nesting"
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7061 \begin_inset Index idx
7066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7068 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7085 name "sec:Enumerate"
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7097 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7098 It has these properties:
7101 \begin_layout Enumerate
7102 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7106 \begin_layout Enumerate
7107 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7111 \begin_layout Enumerate
7113 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7116 \begin_layout Enumerate
7121 environment resets the counter to one.
7124 \begin_layout Enumerate
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7138 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7139 Items can have any length.
7142 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7146 \begin_layout Enumerate
7147 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7151 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7155 \begin_layout Standard
7164 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7166 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7167 labels the four different levels in an
7174 \begin_layout Enumerate
7175 The first level of an
7179 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7183 \begin_layout Enumerate
7184 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7188 \begin_layout Enumerate
7189 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7193 \begin_layout Enumerate
7194 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7197 \begin_layout Enumerate
7198 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
7203 \begin_layout Enumerate
7204 Back to the third level
7208 \begin_layout Enumerate
7209 Back to the second level.
7213 \begin_layout Enumerate
7214 Back to the outermost level.
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7222 environment, see section
7223 \begin_inset space ~
7227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7229 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7234 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7239 There is more to nesting
7243 environments than we've stated here.
7244 You should read section
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7251 reference "sec:Nesting"
7255 to learn more about nesting.
7258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 Unlike the previous two environments, the
7289 list has no fixed label.
7290 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
7292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7299 of the first line as the label.
7303 \begin_layout Description
7304 Example: This is an example of the
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7313 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
7317 \begin_layout Standard
7319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7326 it is meant that the first usage of the
7330 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
7332 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7333 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7337 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7346 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7352 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7354 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7356 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7360 \begin_inset space ~
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7372 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7376 for more information.) Here is an example:
7379 \begin_layout Description
7381 \begin_inset space ~
7384 Example: This one shows how to use a
7385 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7389 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7393 \begin_inset space ~
7405 \begin_layout Description
7406 Usage: You should use the
7410 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7411 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
7413 It's not a good idea to use a
7417 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7418 You're better off using
7430 paragraphs into them.
7433 \begin_layout Description
7434 Nesting: You can nest
7438 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
7442 \begin_layout Standard
7443 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
7444 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
7445 them from the first line.
7448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7450 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7457 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7479 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7480 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7484 \begin_layout Standard
7493 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7495 Here are its properties:
7498 \begin_layout Labeling
7499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7504 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7513 of each line as the item label.
7518 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7519 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a
7520 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
7522 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
7525 space as described above.
7528 \begin_layout Labeling
7529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7530 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7531 uses different margins for the item label and the
7532 body of the item text.
7533 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7534 label width plus a little extra space.
7537 \begin_layout Labeling
7538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7543 width \SpecialChar LyX
7544 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7545 If the label width is larger, the label
7546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7553 into the first line.
7554 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7555 margin of the rest of the item text.
7558 \begin_layout Labeling
7559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7561 \begin_inset space ~
7564 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7569 environment has the same left margin.
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7576 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7578 \begin_inset space ~
7583 dialog (toolbar button
7586 arg "layout-paragraph"
7593 \begin_inset space ~
7598 determines the default label width.
7599 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7608 multiple times instead.
7609 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7619 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 every time you alter a label in a
7632 \begin_inset Newline newline
7635 The predefined default width is the length of
7636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7644 \begin_inset space ~
7650 \begin_layout Standard
7655 list the same way as the
7659 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7665 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7674 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7675 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7677 \begin_inset space ~
7681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7683 reference "sec:Nesting"
7687 to learn about nesting.
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7691 There is yet another feature of the
7695 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7696 left-justifies the item labels by
7698 You can use additional
7701 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
7706 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7707 justifies the item label.
7711 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
7713 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
7715 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
7720 are documented in section
7721 \begin_inset space ~
7725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7727 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7732 Here are some examples:
7735 \begin_layout Labeling
7736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7737 Left The default for
7744 \begin_layout Labeling
7745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7746 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7752 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
7757 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7760 \begin_layout Labeling
7761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7762 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7772 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
7777 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7780 \begin_layout Subsection
7782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7784 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7789 \begin_inset Index idx
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 \begin_layout Standard
7814 The features described in this section require that the module
7816 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7818 is loaded in the document settings.
7819 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7825 \begin_inset Index idx
7830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7851 Custom Enumerate Lists
7852 \begin_inset Index idx
7857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7859 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7869 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7888 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7894 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7895 There you add the command
7898 \begin_layout Standard
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7919 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7920 Code, look at section
7921 \begin_inset space ~
7925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7927 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7940 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7947 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7948 For capital Roman numerals replace
7960 in the command above.
7961 For Arabic numerals use
7969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7976 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8001 You can only number 26
8002 \begin_inset space ~
8005 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8014 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
8015 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
8018 \begin_layout Standard
8019 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8022 \begin_layout Enumerate
8023 \begin_inset Argument 1
8026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8052 \begin_layout Enumerate
8053 \begin_inset Argument 1
8056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8079 \begin_layout Enumerate
8084 \begin_layout Enumerate
8085 \begin_inset Argument 1
8088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8112 \begin_layout Enumerate
8113 \begin_inset Argument 1
8116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8142 \begin_layout Standard
8143 For this list these commands were used:
8146 \begin_layout Standard
8157 \begin_inset Newline newline
8165 \begin_inset Newline newline
8173 \begin_inset Newline newline
8183 \begin_layout Standard
8190 makes the label emphasized and
8199 \begin_layout Standard
8200 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8208 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
8209 lists until you change the definition.
8217 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8219 \begin_inset Index idx
8224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8226 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8254 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8257 \begin_layout Enumerate
8258 \begin_inset Argument 1
8261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8280 \begin_inset Note Note
8283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8284 goes back to default numbering
8292 \begin_layout Enumerate
8296 \begin_layout Standard
8300 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8305 To resume an enumeration, use the style
8311 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8312 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8313 to indicate that it is a resumed list
8314 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8315 , but in the output.
8320 \begin_layout Standard
8321 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8329 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8338 \begin_layout Standard
8339 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
8341 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8342 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
8343 of a normal enumeration.
8344 There, insert the command
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8353 \begin_layout Standard
8358 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8362 \begin_layout Enumerate
8366 \begin_layout Enumerate
8370 \begin_layout Standard
8371 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8374 \begin_layout Enumerate
8375 \begin_inset Argument 1
8378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 This enumeration starts at 4
8397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8424 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
8426 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8429 \begin_layout Itemize
8433 \begin_layout Itemize
8434 with standard spacing
8437 \begin_layout Standard
8438 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
8440 Add there the command
8444 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8447 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_inset Argument 1
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8470 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8478 \begin_layout Standard
8479 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8486 \begin_inset Index idx
8491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8494 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8509 For more information see its documentation,
8510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
8523 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
8524 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8528 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8531 \begin_layout Enumerate
8532 \begin_inset Argument 1
8535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8543 parindent, labelsep=2cm
8556 \begin_layout Enumerate
8557 with negative indentation
8560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8561 Further Customization
8562 \begin_inset Index idx
8567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8569 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 You can also change the style of description lists.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8598 changes the description label font, the command
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8607 \begin_layout Standard
8608 sets the list style.
8611 \begin_layout Standard
8612 An example where the command
8615 \begin_layout Standard
8620 itshape, style=nextline
8623 \begin_layout Standard
8627 \begin_layout Description
8629 \begin_inset space ~
8633 \begin_inset Argument 1
8636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8642 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8644 itshape, style=nextline
8654 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8655 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8659 \begin_layout Description
8661 \begin_inset space ~
8664 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8665 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8666 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8669 \begin_layout Standard
8670 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8676 \begin_inset Index idx
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8699 For more information see its documentation
8700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8710 \begin_layout Subsection
8712 \begin_inset Index idx
8717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8728 \begin_inset space ~
8731 Address: An Overview
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8736 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8744 \begin_inset space ~
8750 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8751 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8752 gags on the document.
8753 In contrast, you can use the
8760 \begin_inset space ~
8765 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8766 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8770 \begin_layout Standard
8771 Of course, you're not limited to using
8778 \begin_inset space ~
8787 \begin_inset space ~
8792 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8793 some European academic papers.
8796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8800 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8812 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8813 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8817 \begin_inset space ~
8822 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8823 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8824 Here's an example of each:
8827 \begin_layout Right Address
8829 \begin_inset Newline newline
8833 \begin_inset Newline newline
8837 \begin_inset Newline newline
8840 When is it? What is today?
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset space ~
8853 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8855 the largest block of text on a single line.
8856 Here's an example of the
8863 \begin_layout Address
8865 \begin_inset Newline newline
8868 Where do I send this
8869 \begin_inset Newline newline
8872 Your post office and country
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 As you can see, both
8883 \begin_inset space ~
8888 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8893 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8894 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8900 This makes sense, since
8908 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8909 Thus, you have to use
8916 arg "newline-insert newline"
8921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8924 \begin_inset space ~
8928 \begin_inset space ~
8933 ) to start a new line in an
8940 \begin_inset space ~
8948 \begin_layout Subsection
8952 \begin_layout Standard
8953 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8954 or list of references.
8956 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8961 \begin_inset Index idx
8966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8980 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8981 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8982 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8983 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8987 in anything else or vice versa.
8993 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8994 The book document classes ignores the
8998 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
9002 in a letter document class.
9005 \begin_layout Standard
9010 environment does several things for you.
9011 First, it puts the centered label
9012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9020 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
9022 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
9023 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
9024 the subsequent text.
9025 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9027 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9032 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9036 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9037 The new paragraph will still be in the
9042 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
9043 finish entering the abstract of your document.
9046 \begin_layout Standard
9047 \begin_inset Float figure
9054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9056 \begin_inset Graphics
9057 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9065 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9070 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9091 \begin_layout Standard
9092 We would love to demonstrate the
9096 environment, but since this document is in the
9097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9104 class, we can't do this.
9105 We inserted it therefore as figure
9106 \begin_inset space ~
9110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9112 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9117 If you have never heard of an
9118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9125 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
9128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9130 \begin_inset Index idx
9135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9144 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9156 environment is used to list references.
9157 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
9158 only use it at the end of the document.
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9171 When you first open a
9175 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
9176 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
9177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9192 depending on the document class.
9193 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9194 Each paragraph of the
9198 environment is a bibliography entry.
9203 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9204 Each new paragraph is still in the
9211 \begin_layout Standard
9212 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
9213 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9215 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9217 handling, have a look at section
9218 \begin_inset space ~
9222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9224 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9231 \begin_layout Subsection
9232 Special Environments
9235 \begin_layout Standard
9237 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
9238 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9246 \begin_inset Index idx
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9261 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9268 \begin_layout Standard
9274 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9276 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9281 key as a fixed whitespace.
9285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9296 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9300 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9304 \begin_inset space ~
9308 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9310 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9315 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9333 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
9336 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
9339 arg "newline-insert newline"
9356 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9357 So, when you finish using the
9362 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9363 Also, you can nest the
9368 environment inside of others.
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9372 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9375 \begin_layout Itemize
9379 arg "newline-insert newline"
9382 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9387 \begin_inset space \space{}
9397 arg "newline-insert newline"
9403 \begin_layout Itemize
9407 arg "newline-insert newline"
9417 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9423 \begin_layout Itemize
9424 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9425 You must put at least one
9429 in any line you want blank.
9430 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
9434 \begin_layout Itemize
9435 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9439 since that will insert
9444 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9447 arg "self-insert \""
9453 \begin_layout Standard
9457 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9461 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9465 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9469 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9473 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9474 printf("Hello World!
9479 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9483 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9487 \begin_layout Standard
9488 This is just the standard
9489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9499 \begin_layout Standard
9505 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
9507 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
9508 as if you used a typewriter.
9509 \begin_inset Index idx
9514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9515 Paragraph environments
9520 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
9523 Program Code Listings
9528 \begin_inset space ~
9536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9540 \begin_inset Index idx
9545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9554 \begin_layout Standard
9559 environment is similar to the
9564 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
9565 computer console text.
9570 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9584 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
9585 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
9587 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
9590 space) and you can have empty lines.
9603 \begin_layout Itemize
9604 have a certain language and a text style
9607 \begin_layout Itemize
9608 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
9609 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
9610 and \SpecialChar TeX
9614 \begin_layout Standard
9615 Because of these properties
9619 works like a typewriter.
9623 \begin_layout Verbatim
9627 \begin_layout Verbatim
9630 The following 2 lines are empty:
9633 \begin_layout Verbatim
9637 \begin_layout Verbatim
9641 \begin_layout Verbatim
9642 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9647 \begin_layout Standard
9652 environment is identical to
9656 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9657 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9664 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9668 \begin_layout Section
9669 Nesting Environments
9670 \begin_inset Index idx
9675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9701 \begin_layout Subsection
9705 \begin_layout Standard
9707 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9709 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9711 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9713 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 \begin_layout Enumerate
9738 \begin_layout Enumerate
9743 \begin_layout Enumerate
9747 \begin_layout Standard
9748 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9749 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9751 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9753 \begin_inset space ~
9757 \begin_inset space ~
9765 \begin_inset space ~
9769 \begin_inset space ~
9774 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9776 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9779 arg "depth-increment"
9785 arg "depth-decrement"
9799 arg "depth-increment"
9805 arg "depth-decrement"
9809 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9810 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9815 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9816 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9817 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9818 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9819 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9822 \begin_layout Standard
9823 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9825 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9827 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9830 \begin_layout Subsection
9831 What You Can and Can't Nest
9834 \begin_layout Standard
9835 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9836 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9839 \begin_layout Standard
9840 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9841 than a simple yes or no.
9842 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9845 \begin_layout Itemize
9846 Completely unnestable
9849 \begin_layout Itemize
9850 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9854 \begin_layout Itemize
9855 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9859 \begin_layout Standard
9860 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9861 environments have them:
9864 \begin_layout Description
9865 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9866 Can't nest into them.
9870 \begin_layout Itemize
9876 \begin_layout Itemize
9882 \begin_layout Itemize
9888 \begin_layout Itemize
9894 \begin_layout Itemize
9901 \begin_layout Description
9903 \begin_inset space ~
9906 Nestable You can nest them.
9907 You can nest other things into them.
9911 \begin_layout Itemize
9917 \begin_layout Itemize
9923 \begin_layout Itemize
9929 \begin_layout Itemize
9935 \begin_layout Itemize
9941 \begin_layout Itemize
9947 \begin_layout Itemize
9953 \begin_layout Itemize
9960 \begin_layout Itemize
9966 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 \begin_layout Description
9974 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9975 You can't nest anything into them.
9979 \begin_layout Itemize
9985 \begin_layout Itemize
9991 \begin_layout Itemize
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
10003 \begin_layout Itemize
10009 \begin_layout Itemize
10015 \begin_layout Itemize
10021 \begin_layout Itemize
10027 \begin_layout Itemize
10033 \begin_layout Itemize
10039 \begin_layout Itemize
10045 \begin_layout Itemize
10051 \begin_layout Itemize
10057 \begin_layout Itemize
10061 \begin_inset space ~
10067 \begin_layout Itemize
10074 \begin_layout Standard
10075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10083 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
10093 \begin_inset space ~
10096 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
10097 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
10098 nested section headings violate this.
10106 \begin_layout Subsection
10107 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
10108 \begin_inset Index idx
10113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10115 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10132 \begin_layout Standard
10133 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
10134 affected by nesting anyhow.
10138 \begin_layout Itemize
10142 \begin_layout Itemize
10146 \begin_layout Itemize
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10152 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10160 Figures and tables in
10164 are not affected by this.
10169 Have a look at section
10170 \begin_inset space ~
10174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10176 reference "sec:Floats"
10180 for more information about
10187 \begin_layout Standard
10189 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10190 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
10194 \begin_layout Standard
10195 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
10196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10203 of its own, it behaves just like a
10204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10211 paragraph environment.
10212 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
10216 \begin_layout Standard
10217 Here's an example with a table:
10220 \begin_layout Enumerate
10225 \begin_layout Enumerate
10226 This is (a) and it's nested.
10230 \begin_layout Standard
10231 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10237 \begin_layout Standard
10239 \begin_inset Tabular
10240 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10241 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10327 \begin_layout Standard
10328 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10335 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10341 \begin_layout Enumerate
10345 \begin_layout Standard
10346 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
10349 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Enumerate
10355 This is (a) and it's nested.
10359 \begin_layout Standard
10360 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10366 \begin_layout Standard
10368 \begin_inset Tabular
10369 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10370 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10371 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10372 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10456 \begin_layout Standard
10457 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10463 \begin_layout Enumerate
10470 In fact, it's not nested at all.
10473 \begin_layout Enumerate
10477 \begin_layout Standard
10478 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
10479 item of a new list!
10482 \begin_layout Standard
10483 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
10486 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10489 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 This is (a) and it's nested.
10498 \begin_layout Standard
10499 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10507 \begin_inset Tabular
10508 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10509 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10511 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10596 \begin_layout Standard
10597 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10603 \begin_layout Enumerate
10605 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
10612 \begin_layout Enumerate
10616 \begin_layout Standard
10617 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
10623 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10624 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
10628 \begin_layout Subsection
10629 Usage and General Features
10632 \begin_layout Standard
10633 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10634 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10643 is the innermost possible depth.
10644 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10647 \begin_layout Enumerate
10648 level #1 – outermost
10652 \begin_layout Enumerate
10657 \begin_layout Enumerate
10662 \begin_layout Enumerate
10667 \begin_layout Itemize
10672 \begin_layout Itemize
10681 \begin_layout Standard
10682 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10683 both of them in the example.
10684 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10694 For example, if we tried to nest another
10699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10706 , we would get errors.
10709 \begin_layout Subsection
10711 \begin_inset Index idx
10716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10718 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10735 \begin_layout Standard
10736 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10737 We have several examples of nested environments.
10738 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10743 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10746 \begin_layout Labeling
10747 \labelwidthstring MMM
10748 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10757 \begin_layout Labeling
10758 \labelwidthstring MMM
10759 #2-a This is level #2.
10760 We created it by using
10763 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10769 arg "depth-increment"
10776 \begin_layout Labeling
10777 \labelwidthstring MMM
10778 #3-a This is level #3.
10779 This time, we just enter
10786 arg "depth-increment"
10790 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10794 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10800 arg "depth-increment"
10807 \begin_layout Standard
10812 environment, nested inside of
10813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10821 So, it's at level #4.
10822 We did this by entering
10825 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10831 arg "depth-increment"
10834 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10839 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10860 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10863 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10869 \begin_layout Labeling
10870 \labelwidthstring MMM
10871 #4-a This is level #4.
10875 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10878 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10883 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10887 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10892 keep nesting things inside
10893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10904 \begin_layout Labeling
10905 \labelwidthstring MMM
10906 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10911 \begin_layout Labeling
10912 \labelwidthstring MMM
10913 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10914 and this is level #6.
10915 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10919 \begin_layout Labeling
10920 \labelwidthstring MMM
10921 #5-b Back to level #5.
10925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10931 arg "depth-decrement"
10938 \begin_layout Labeling
10939 \labelwidthstring MMM
10943 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10949 arg "depth-decrement"
10952 , we're back at level #4.
10956 \begin_layout Labeling
10957 \labelwidthstring MMM
10958 #3-b Back to level #3.
10959 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10963 \begin_layout Labeling
10964 \labelwidthstring MMM
10965 #2-b Back to level #2.
10969 \begin_layout Labeling
10970 \labelwidthstring MMM
10971 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10972 After this sentence, we will enter
10976 and change the paragraph environment back to
10983 \begin_layout Standard
10984 We could have also used the
11000 environment in place of the
11005 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11009 Example 2: Inheritance
11012 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11013 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
11016 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11025 arg "depth-increment"
11029 \begin_inset Newline newline
11032 which, we will change to the
11040 \begin_layout Enumerate
11045 environment, at level #2.
11048 \begin_layout Enumerate
11049 Notice how the nested
11053 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11057 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
11061 \begin_layout Standard
11062 We ended this example by entering
11067 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11071 and reset the nesting depth by using
11074 arg "depth-decrement"
11080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11081 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
11090 \begin_inset Argument 1
11093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11094 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
11102 \begin_layout Enumerate
11103 This is level #1, in an
11107 paragraph environment.
11108 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11112 \begin_layout Enumerate
11117 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11123 arg "depth-increment"
11127 Now, what happens if we nest an
11131 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
11132 label be? An asterisk?
11136 \begin_layout Itemize
11146 environment, even though it's at level #3.
11147 So, its label is a bullet.
11148 (We got here by using
11151 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11157 arg "depth-increment"
11160 , then changing the environment to
11168 \begin_layout Itemize
11169 Here's level #4, produced using
11172 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11178 arg "depth-increment"
11182 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11187 \begin_layout Enumerate
11189 to get to level #5.
11190 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11195 Notice the type of numbering, it is
11199 , because we are in the
11207 environment (that is, it is an
11222 \begin_layout Enumerate
11227 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
11228 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11232 \begin_layout Enumerate
11233 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
11236 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11239 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11242 \begin_layout Enumerate
11246 arg "depth-decrement"
11249 to decrease the depth after the next
11252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11259 \begin_layout Enumerate
11261 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11266 \begin_layout Enumerate
11268 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
11269 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
11273 \begin_layout Enumerate
11274 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
11283 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
11288 reset the counter for the label.
11292 \begin_layout Enumerate
11296 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11302 arg "depth-decrement"
11305 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
11306 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
11307 into the twofold-nested
11315 \begin_layout Enumerate
11316 The same thing happens if we do another
11319 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11325 arg "depth-decrement"
11328 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11332 Lastly, we reset the environment to
11337 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
11348 The number of other
11352 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11359 The same rule applies for the
11363 environment, as well.
11366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11367 Example 4: Going Bonkers
11370 \begin_layout Enumerate
11371 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11372 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
11373 the same detail with how we did it.
11382 \begin_layout Standard
11390 arg "depth-increment"
11397 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
11398 the example in parentheses someplace.
11399 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11400 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11401 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
11405 \begin_layout Enumerate
11410 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11414 \begin_layout Verse
11415 Now we will add verse.
11416 \begin_inset Newline newline
11419 It will get much worse.
11420 \begin_inset Newline newline
11430 arg "depth-increment"
11440 \begin_layout Verse
11441 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
11442 \begin_inset Newline newline
11445 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11446 \begin_inset Newline newline
11452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11460 \begin_layout Verse
11461 Here comes a table:
11465 \begin_layout Standard
11466 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11472 \begin_layout Standard
11474 \begin_inset Tabular
11475 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11476 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11478 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11563 \begin_layout Verse
11567 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11577 arg "depth-increment"
11583 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11589 \begin_inset Newline newline
11597 arg "depth-decrement"
11604 \begin_layout Enumerate
11609 : level #1) This is another item.
11610 Note that selecting a
11614 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
11615 3 times to put the table inside the
11622 \begin_layout Quotation
11623 We're now ending the
11627 list and changing to
11632 We're still at level #1.
11633 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11634 The next set of paragraphs is a
11635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11642 We will nest both the
11649 \begin_inset space ~
11654 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
11658 for the letter body.
11662 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11665 to preserve the depth.
11666 Remember that you need to use
11669 arg "newline-insert newline"
11672 to create multiple lines inside the
11679 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_layout Right Address
11691 \begin_inset Newline newline
11694 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11695 \begin_inset Newline newline
11701 \begin_layout Address
11703 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_layout Quotation
11710 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11714 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11715 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11716 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11717 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11718 as soon as possible.
11719 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11722 \begin_layout Quotation
11723 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11724 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11725 with your order, along with payment.
11728 \begin_layout Quotation
11729 We thank you again for your patience.
11732 \begin_layout Address
11734 \begin_inset Newline newline
11741 \begin_layout Quotation
11742 That ends that example!
11745 \begin_layout Standard
11746 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11747 gives you a lot of power with just
11749 We could have easily nested an
11770 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11773 \begin_layout Subsection
11775 \begin_inset Index idx
11780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11799 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11806 \begin_layout Standard
11807 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11809 For example you need two different enumerations:
11812 \begin_layout Enumerate
11817 \begin_layout Enumerate
11822 \begin_layout Enumerate
11826 \begin_layout Standard
11827 \begin_inset Separator plain
11833 \begin_layout Itemize
11839 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11846 \begin_layout Enumerate
11850 \begin_layout Enumerate
11854 \begin_layout Enumerate
11858 \begin_layout Standard
11859 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11860 list item and use the menu
11862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11863 Separated <Name> Above
11867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11868 Separated <Name> Below
11871 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11872 ) and before or behind it the
11874 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11878 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11879 (red arrow in LyX).
11880 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11881 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11884 \begin_layout Standard
11885 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11888 arg "paragraph-break"
11895 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11898 \begin_layout Section
11899 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11900 \begin_inset Index idx
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11914 \begin_layout Standard
11915 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11916 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11918 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11919 be broken at the end of a line.
11920 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11924 \begin_layout Subsection
11926 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
11928 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
11932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11934 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11939 \begin_inset Index idx
11944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11946 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
11953 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
11969 \begin_layout Standard
11971 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
11973 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
11976 space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11977 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11979 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
11982 break the line at that point.
11983 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11986 \begin_layout Quote
11987 Further documentation is given in section
11988 \begin_inset Newline newline
11992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11994 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12001 \begin_layout Standard
12002 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a
12003 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12005 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12023 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12033 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12035 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12041 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12043 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12045 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12049 \begin_inset space ~
12057 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12067 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12072 \begin_inset Index idx
12077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12079 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12100 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 The length units are listed in Appendix
12105 \begin_inset space ~
12109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12111 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12120 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12122 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12126 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12130 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12135 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12139 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12146 \begin_inset Index idx
12151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12153 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12160 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12176 \begin_layout Standard
12177 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
12178 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
12179 at the ends of sentences.
12180 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12181 automatically takes care about this.
12182 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
12183 followed by a period; see section
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12190 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12195 To insert a normal space, select
12197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12200 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12202 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12206 \begin_inset space ~
12214 arg "space-insert normal"
12220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12222 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12228 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12233 \begin_inset Index idx
12238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12240 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12257 \begin_layout Standard
12259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12263 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12275 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
12277 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
12281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
12286 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
12287 inside abbreviations:
12290 \begin_layout Quote
12292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12296 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12299 \begin_layout Standard
12300 or between values and units.
12301 Compare for example this:
12302 \begin_inset Newline newline
12306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12310 \begin_inset Newline newline
12313 10 kg (normal space
12314 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
12320 \begin_layout Standard
12321 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12323 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12324 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12326 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
12328 \begin_inset space ~
12334 \begin_inset space ~
12342 arg "space-insert thin"
12348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12353 You can also insert the following space types:
12356 \begin_layout Description
12358 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12370 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12374 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12378 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
12380 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
12383 space between the arrows.
12384 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
12388 \begin_layout Description
12390 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
12392 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12399 space A line with a
12400 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12404 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12408 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12412 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
12414 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
12417 space between the arrows.
12420 \begin_layout Description
12422 \begin_inset space ~
12426 \begin_inset space ~
12429 space A line with a
12430 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12434 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12438 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12441 negative thin space between the arrows.
12444 \begin_layout Description
12446 \begin_inset space ~
12450 \begin_inset space ~
12453 space A line with a
12454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12458 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12465 negative medium space between the arrows.
12468 \begin_layout Description
12470 \begin_inset space ~
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12477 space A line with a
12478 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12482 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12486 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12489 negative thick space between the arrows.
12492 \begin_layout Description
12494 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
12496 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
12498 \begin_inset space ~
12504 \begin_inset space ~
12508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12512 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12516 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12520 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12524 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
12526 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12541 em) space between the arrows.
12544 \begin_layout Description
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12554 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12558 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12562 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12566 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
12568 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
12572 \begin_inset space ~
12576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12579 em) space between the arrows.
12582 \begin_layout Description
12584 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
12586 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
12588 \begin_inset space ~
12594 \begin_inset space ~
12598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12602 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12606 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12610 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12614 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
12616 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
12618 \begin_inset space ~
12622 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12633 em) space between the arrows.
12636 \begin_layout Description
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12642 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12646 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12651 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12658 cm space between the arrows.
12661 \begin_layout Standard
12663 \begin_inset space ~
12667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12669 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12673 lists the different space sizes.
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 \begin_inset Float table
12684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12685 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12690 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12694 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12704 \begin_inset Tabular
12705 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12706 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12707 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12708 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12743 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12763 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
12765 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
12766 Non-breaking Normal
12773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12806 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
12808 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12823 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12829 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12840 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12851 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
12852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12857 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12868 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
12870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12889 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12894 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
12896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12900 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12940 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12969 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
12971 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
12975 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
12977 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
12981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12994 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
12996 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13004 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13006 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13022 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13057 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13069 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13097 \begin_inset Index idx
13102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13104 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13121 \begin_layout Standard
13122 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13123 feature for adding extra space
13124 in a uniform fashion.
13126 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13129 Fill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals the
13130 remaining space between the left and right margins.
13131 If there is more than one H
13132 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13135 Fill on a line, they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13142 \begin_layout Quote
13144 This is on the left side
13145 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13148 This is on the right
13151 \begin_layout Quote
13154 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13158 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13164 \begin_layout Quote
13167 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13171 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13175 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13181 \begin_layout Standard
13182 That was an example in the
13188 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13192 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13196 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13199 is one in a standard paragraph.
13200 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
13204 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13207 \begin_layout Standard
13209 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13211 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13214 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13217 \begin_inset space ~
13222 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13227 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_layout Standard
13239 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13243 \begin_inset space ~
13249 \begin_layout Standard
13251 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13255 \begin_inset space ~
13261 \begin_layout Standard
13263 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13267 \begin_inset space ~
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13275 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
13277 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
13281 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
13282 (= opened downwards)
13285 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13289 \begin_inset space ~
13295 \begin_layout Standard
13297 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
13299 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
13303 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
13307 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13317 \begin_layout Standard
13318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13327 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
13329 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
13332 is at the beginning of a line, and
13336 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
13339 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
13341 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
13344 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13345 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
13346 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
13350 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
13355 option in the space dialog.
13363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13367 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13372 \begin_inset Index idx
13377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13396 \begin_layout Standard
13397 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13398 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13401 \begin_layout Standard
13402 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13405 What is correct English?:
13406 \begin_inset Newline newline
13410 \begin_inset Newline newline
13414 \begin_inset space ~
13417 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13418 \begin_inset Newline newline
13422 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13433 \begin_inset Newline newline
13437 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13454 \begin_layout Standard
13456 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13473 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13476 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13480 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
13482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13486 \begin_inset space ~
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13497 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13506 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13507 That is why it is named
13508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13516 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13517 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
13521 \begin_layout Subsection
13523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13525 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13530 \begin_inset Index idx
13535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13537 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13554 \begin_layout Standard
13555 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
13557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13558 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13560 \begin_inset space ~
13566 There you find the following sizes:
13569 \begin_layout Standard
13573 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
13581 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
13589 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
13594 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13595 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13599 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
13604 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13606 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13607 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13609 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset Index idx
13620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13636 for the paragraph separation.
13637 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13640 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
13648 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
13654 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
13658 \begin_layout Standard
13660 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
13669 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
13670 size including line spacing.
13675 \begin_layout Standard
13679 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
13685 \begin_inset Index idx
13690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13692 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13706 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13707 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13712 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
13713 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
13717 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
13725 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
13730 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13738 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
13743 s are described in section
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13750 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13759 If there are several
13762 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
13767 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13768 You can therefore use
13771 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
13776 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13779 \begin_layout Standard
13784 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13785 \begin_inset space ~
13789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13791 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13809 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
13810 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13822 \begin_layout Subsection
13823 Paragraph Alignment
13824 \begin_inset Index idx
13829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13849 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13851 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13854 dialog (toolbar button
13857 arg "layout-paragraph"
13861 There are five possibilities:
13864 \begin_layout Itemize
13872 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13878 \begin_layout Itemize
13886 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13892 \begin_layout Itemize
13900 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13906 \begin_layout Itemize
13914 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13920 \begin_layout Itemize
13928 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13934 \begin_layout Standard
13935 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
13936 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
13937 the left and right margins.
13938 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
13941 \begin_layout Standard
13943 This paragraph is right aligned,
13946 \begin_layout Standard
13948 this one is centered,
13951 \begin_layout Standard
13953 this one is left aligned.
13956 \begin_layout Subsection
13958 \begin_inset Index idx
13963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13965 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13982 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13989 \begin_layout Standard
13990 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13991 does the page breaks in your document, you can
13992 force a page break where you want one.
13993 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13994 is good at page breaking.
13995 Only if you use a lot of
13999 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
14000 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14003 \begin_layout Standard
14004 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
14005 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14009 have to change the page breaking.
14012 \begin_layout Standard
14013 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
14015 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14018 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14020 \begin_inset space ~
14026 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
14028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14029 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14031 \begin_inset space ~
14036 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
14038 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
14039 on which only the last few lines are absent.
14042 \begin_layout Standard
14043 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
14044 at the top of a page.
14045 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
14047 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
14048 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
14049 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14053 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14057 to learn more about
14064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14068 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14073 \begin_inset Index idx
14078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14080 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14097 \begin_layout Standard
14098 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
14099 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14100 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
14101 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
14102 it, if necessary by adding pages.
14105 \begin_layout Standard
14106 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14109 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14111 \begin_inset space ~
14117 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
14119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14120 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14122 \begin_inset space ~
14126 \begin_inset space ~
14131 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
14132 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
14133 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14139 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14140 Suppressing Page Breaks
14143 \begin_inset Index idx
14148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14150 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14154 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14169 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14173 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14178 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14182 \begin_layout Standard
14184 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14185 To discourage page break at
14186 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14188 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14189 certain point you can use
14193 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14195 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14198 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14200 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14207 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14208 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
14209 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
14210 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14215 \begin_layout Subsection
14217 \begin_inset Index idx
14222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14231 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14238 \begin_layout Standard
14239 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
14241 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14246 \begin_inset space ~
14250 \begin_inset space ~
14258 arg "newline-insert newline"
14262 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14265 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14267 \begin_inset space ~
14271 \begin_inset space ~
14279 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14282 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
14284 This is useful to avoid
14285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14292 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14295 \begin_layout Standard
14296 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14297 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14299 very good at line breaking.
14300 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
14301 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14308 reference "sec:Quote"
14313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14315 reference "sec:Verse"
14320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14322 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14329 \begin_layout Subsection
14331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14333 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14338 \begin_inset Index idx
14343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14352 \begin_layout Standard
14354 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14365 \begin_layout Standard
14369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14370 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14372 \begin_inset space ~
14377 you can insert horizontal lines.
14378 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
14379 of the current text line or the paragraph.
14380 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14383 \begin_layout Standard
14385 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14396 \begin_layout Section
14397 Characters and Symbols
14400 \begin_layout Standard
14401 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14402 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
14403 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14411 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14415 for information on how this is done.
14418 \begin_layout Standard
14419 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
14424 dialog via the menu
14426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14427 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14433 \begin_layout Standard
14434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14442 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
14443 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14445 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14453 \begin_layout Section
14454 Fonts and Text Styles
14455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14457 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14464 \begin_layout Subsection
14466 \begin_inset Index idx
14471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14473 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14490 \begin_layout Standard
14491 There are two types of fonts:
14494 \begin_layout Description
14496 \begin_inset space ~
14500 \begin_inset Index idx
14505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14507 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14521 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14526 characters) in the font.
14527 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
14528 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14529 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
14530 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14531 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14532 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
14533 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14534 \begin_inset Newline newline
14537 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14538 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
14539 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
14540 sizes than at small ones.
14541 \begin_inset Newline newline
14555 \begin_inset space ~
14563 \begin_layout Description
14565 \begin_inset space ~
14569 \begin_inset Index idx
14574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14576 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14590 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
14591 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14592 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
14593 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14594 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
14595 image manipulation program.
14596 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
14597 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14598 \begin_inset space ~
14601 pixels high up to 34
14602 \begin_inset space ~
14605 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14606 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
14607 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
14609 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
14610 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
14611 \begin_inset Newline newline
14614 Bitmap fonts are named
14617 \begin_inset space ~
14622 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14625 \begin_layout Standard
14626 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
14627 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14628 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14629 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
14630 use scalable fonts.
14633 \begin_layout Standard
14634 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
14637 \begin_layout Standard
14638 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
14640 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
14642 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
14645 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14646 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
14647 font, to emphasize text you use an
14648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14656 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14658 In \SpecialChar LyX
14659 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
14663 \begin_layout Subsection
14666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14668 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14675 \begin_layout Standard
14676 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14677 used its own fonts.
14678 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
14679 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14682 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14683 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
14684 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14685 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
14686 to a word processor.
14687 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
14688 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14689 files are very portable across
14690 different machines.
14691 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14692 has increased a lot
14693 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
14696 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
14698 \begin_inset space ~
14702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14704 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14709 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14710 code in the document
14711 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14714 \begin_layout Standard
14715 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14716 engines that are also able directly
14717 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14719 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14721 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14723 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
14724 that is installed on your system.
14725 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14728 \begin_layout Standard
14729 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14737 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14738 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
14746 \begin_layout Subsection
14747 Document Font and Font size
14748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14750 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14755 \begin_inset Index idx
14760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14762 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14777 \begin_inset Index idx
14782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14784 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14802 You can set the document fonts in the
14804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14808 \begin_inset Index idx
14813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14815 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14834 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
14835 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
14838 \begin_inset space ~
14847 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
14849 \begin_inset space ~
14852 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14855 \begin_layout Standard
14860 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14861 This requires that you use
14873 as the output format, i.
14874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14878 \begin_inset space \space{}
14881 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14882 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14883 installed (see section
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14890 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14895 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14897 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14898 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14903 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
14904 cannot determine the family.
14905 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
14906 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14909 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
14912 \begin_layout Standard
14913 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14914 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
14919 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14925 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14927 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
14929 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
14932 font encoding, this is
14933 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
14934 , depending on the document language,
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
14938 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14946 \begin_inset space ~
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14962 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
14963 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14985 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
14989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15006 European Computer Modern
15009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15017 However, some classes set different default fonts.
15020 \begin_layout Standard
15025 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
15026 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15031 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15034 \begin_inset space ~
15039 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
15045 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
15046 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
15049 \begin_layout Itemize
15053 \begin_inset space ~
15058 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15071 \begin_inset space ~
15076 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15077 community in order to replace
15081 as the default font.
15082 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15083 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
15086 \begin_inset space ~
15099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15100 One difference is improved kerning.
15108 \begin_layout Itemize
15109 If you do not like the look of
15117 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
15118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15122 \begin_inset space ~
15128 \begin_inset space ~
15138 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15139 \begin_inset space ~
15142 serif and typewriter fonts,
15146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15147 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15154 \begin_inset space ~
15163 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
15164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15168 \begin_inset space \space{}
15176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15180 \begin_inset space \space{}
15186 \begin_inset space ~
15194 \begin_inset space ~
15204 but you can also select your own.
15205 \begin_inset Newline newline
15208 The differences between roman,
15211 \begin_inset space ~
15220 fonts are explained in section
15221 \begin_inset space ~
15225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15227 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15232 \begin_inset Newline newline
15238 \begin_inset space ~
15243 was originally designed for newspapers.
15244 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
15245 into the small newspaper columns.
15249 \begin_inset space ~
15254 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15257 \begin_layout Standard
15258 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15271 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15276 depends on the class you are using.
15277 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15280 \begin_layout Standard
15281 Note that the font size is the
15286 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15287 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
15288 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
15289 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15292 \begin_inset space ~
15298 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15299 \begin_inset space ~
15303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15305 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15312 \begin_layout Standard
15316 \begin_inset space ~
15321 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
15323 \begin_inset space ~
15326 serif or typewriter.
15331 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
15341 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15349 LaTeX font encoding
15351 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
15352 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15358 \begin_inset Index idx
15363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15366 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15381 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
15383 \begin_inset space ~
15387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15389 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
15396 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15397 Unless you have specific reasons, use
15398 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
15402 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 With some fonts, the checkboxes
15413 Use Old Style Figures
15417 Use True Small Caps
15420 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15423 Use Old Style Figures
15425 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
15427 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15435 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
15439 Use True Small Caps
15441 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
15442 of scaled capitals.
15443 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
15444 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15445 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
15449 \begin_layout Standard
15451 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
15452 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
15453 provided by the font package (or the
15457 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
15462 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15468 \begin_layout Standard
15473 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
15474 a font to display the script characters.
15478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15479 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15485 \begin_inset Index idx
15490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15493 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15507 So this has no effect for the document language
15523 \begin_layout Standard
15526 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15528 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
15529 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15535 \begin_inset Index idx
15540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15543 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15561 \begin_layout Standard
15564 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15566 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15571 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15572 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15578 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
15579 \begin_inset space ~
15583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15585 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15595 \begin_layout Standard
15596 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15600 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15608 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
15613 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15614 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15616 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15618 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15621 dialog, see section
15622 \begin_inset space ~
15626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15628 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15640 \begin_layout Subsection
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15646 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
15648 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15649 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
15650 choose a math font in the dialog
15652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15663 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15679 automatically selects a math font.
15680 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15681 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15690 \begin_inset space ~
15696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15701 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
15702 document font is available.
15705 \begin_layout Standard
15706 Note that the math font will not be used for
15710 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15716 or by the insertion of the command
15723 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15724 \begin_inset space ~
15728 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
15729 while the math characters do not.
15731 \begin_inset space ~
15734 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15737 \begin_inset space ~
15745 \begin_inset space ~
15750 in the document font settings.
15753 \begin_layout Standard
15754 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15755 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
15756 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15757 font (in most cases
15758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15764 \begin_inset space ~
15770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15773 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15774 variant of the document's class default font (in most
15776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15782 \begin_inset space ~
15788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15794 \begin_layout Subsection
15796 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
15798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
15802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
15804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15806 name "subsec:charstyles"
15813 \begin_inset Index idx
15818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15825 \begin_inset Index idx
15830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15839 \begin_layout Standard
15840 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
15841 automatically changes the
15842 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
15845 style for certain paragraph environments.
15847 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
15848 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
15850 This is where we meet the concept of
15856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
15858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
15862 \begin_layout Standard
15864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
15869 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
15871 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
15884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
15890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15893 e., available with all document classes.
15894 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
15898 for specific purposes.
15899 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15902 \begin_layout Standard
15904 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
15905 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15915 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15919 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
15920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15932 — you customized the
15937 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
15938 among them, encourage the use of
15950 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15957 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15962 Rather than fiddling with
15966 , they encourage the use of
15970 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15975 \begin_inset Quotes els
15979 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15982 ), not their form (
15983 \begin_inset Quotes els
15987 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15991 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15992 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
15993 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15994 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15995 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15996 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
16002 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16006 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
16007 With a semantic markup (such as
16011 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
16016 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16018 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
16019 of a document, using different markup semantics.
16022 \begin_layout Standard
16024 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16025 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
16026 by \SpecialChar LyX
16032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16035 Builtin Text Styles
16036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16038 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16045 \begin_layout Standard
16047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16048 The two builtin text styles can be
16049 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16058 both of these styles
16061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16065 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16067 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16069 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16075 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16086 style, do one of the following:
16089 \begin_layout Itemize
16090 click on the toolbar button
16099 \begin_layout Itemize
16100 use the key binding
16107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16111 \begin_layout Itemize
16113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16117 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16119 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16129 arg "dialog-show character"
16133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16137 arg "dialog-show character"
16141 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16142 as described in section
16143 \begin_inset space ~
16147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16149 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16154 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
16164 \begin_layout Standard
16166 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
16168 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
16172 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
16176 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
16178 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
16182 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
16190 style is already active, they deactivate it.
16193 \begin_layout Standard
16194 One typically uses the
16198 style for proper names.
16200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16207 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
16209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
16217 \begin_layout Standard
16219 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
16224 is producing text in
16228 , but the definition can be changed.
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16235 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
16237 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
16245 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
16252 \begin_layout Itemize
16253 clicking on the toolbar button
16262 \begin_layout Itemize
16263 using the keybindings
16270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
16274 \begin_layout Itemize
16276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16280 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
16282 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
16284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16292 arg "dialog-show character"
16296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
16300 arg "dialog-show character"
16304 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
16305 as described in section
16306 \begin_inset space ~
16310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16312 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16317 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
16327 \begin_layout Standard
16332 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
16336 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
16339 packages use a different font
16340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
16341 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16347 \begin_layout Standard
16348 We've been using the
16352 style all over the place in this document.
16353 Here's one more example:
16356 \begin_layout Quotation
16360 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
16362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
16368 \begin_layout Standard
16369 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16370 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16371 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
16372 the common tendency to overuse
16373 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
16375 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
16380 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
16382 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
16386 \begin_layout Standard
16388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
16389 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
16390 only as font changes and integrated in the
16398 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
16401 always reset to the default font using the key binding
16408 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
16410 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
16414 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
16417 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16422 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16424 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16434 arg "dialog-show character"
16440 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16442 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
16448 arg "dialog-show character"
16452 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
16456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
16460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16462 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16469 \begin_layout Standard
16471 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
16472 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
16474 \begin_inset space ~
16478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16480 reference "subsec:Modules"
16487 ), or local layout settings (see section
16488 \begin_inset space ~
16492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16494 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16499 As the two builtin styles, they provide
16503 markup for specific functions.
16504 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
16509 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
16519 \begin_inset Quotes els
16523 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16529 \begin_layout Standard
16531 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
16532 These styles can be found, if available, in the
16534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16536 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
16538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
16544 \begin_layout Standard
16546 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
16547 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
16552 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16553 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
16554 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
16559 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
16560 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
16573 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16574 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16575 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16576 \begin_inset Flex Code
16579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
16590 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
16604 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
16618 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
16619 on screen their formal appearance.
16624 \begin_layout Subsection
16626 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
16628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
16632 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
16638 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
16640 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
16646 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
16648 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
16652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16654 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16659 \begin_inset Index idx
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16673 \begin_layout Standard
16674 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
16675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
16678 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
16680 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
16682 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
16686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
16687 the properties of text passages
16688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
16692 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
16693 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16694 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
16695 from ordinary dialog.
16696 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
16700 \begin_layout Standard
16702 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
16703 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
16704 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
16705 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
16706 the properties of the respective text passages.
16711 comes in as a last resort.
16716 \begin_layout Standard
16717 Before we document how to
16718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
16719 use custom character style
16720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
16721 tweak the text properties
16723 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
16724 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
16726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
16730 \begin_inset Newline newline
16733 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
16734 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16737 \begin_layout Standard
16739 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
16740 use custom character styles
16741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
16742 tweak text properties
16745 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
16748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16750 \begin_inset space ~
16753 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 arg "dialog-show character"
16764 dialog or press the toolbar button
16767 arg "dialog-show character"
16772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
16775 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
16776 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
16778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
16781 property that you can choose.
16782 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
16785 \begin_inset space ~
16790 , which keeps the current state of that property.
16792 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
16796 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
16798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
16803 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16804 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
16805 environments all at once.
16808 \begin_layout Standard
16810 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
16812 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
16816 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
16818 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
16822 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
16824 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
16829 , and their options (in addition to
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16838 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
16842 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
16850 \begin_layout Labeling
16851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16865 The possible options are:
16869 \begin_layout Labeling
16870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16875 This is the Roman font family.
16876 Normally a serif font.
16877 It's also the default family.
16887 \begin_layout Labeling
16888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16892 \begin_inset space ~
16899 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16911 \begin_layout Labeling
16912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16919 This is the Typewriter font family.
16925 arg "font-typewriter"
16931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
16935 \begin_layout Standard
16937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
16938 The general differences of these families are:
16941 \begin_layout Itemize
16943 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
16948 fonts use characters with serifs.
16949 These are the small
16950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16958 The following example shows the difference:
16959 \begin_inset Newline newline
16963 \begin_inset Newline newline
16968 text without serifs
16971 \begin_inset Newline newline
16974 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16975 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16982 \begin_layout Itemize
16984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
16989 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16990 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16991 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16994 \begin_layout Itemize
16996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17009 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17027 \begin_inset Newline newline
17031 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17036 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17049 \begin_inset Note Note
17052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17055 For more on phantoms see section
17056 \begin_inset space ~
17060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17062 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17072 \begin_inset Newline newline
17081 \begin_layout Labeling
17082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17087 This corresponds to the print weight.
17092 \begin_layout Labeling
17093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17098 This is the Medium font series.
17099 It's also the default series.
17102 \begin_layout Labeling
17103 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17110 This is the Bold font series.
17123 \begin_layout Labeling
17124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17129 As the name implies.
17134 \begin_layout Labeling
17135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17140 This is the Upright font shape.
17141 It's also the default shape.
17144 \begin_layout Labeling
17145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
17160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
17165 s the Italic font shape
17171 \begin_layout Labeling
17172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17179 This is the Slanted font shape
17181 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
17182 , this is different from italic).
17185 \begin_layout Labeling
17186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17190 \begin_inset space ~
17197 This is the Small caps font shape
17204 \begin_layout Labeling
17205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17207 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17212 Alters the text color.
17213 Note that not all DVI
17214 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
17216 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17217 viewers are able to display colors.
17221 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17227 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17230 , which means that the document default color set in
17232 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17233 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17239 \begin_inset space ~
17245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
17247 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
17251 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17336 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
17357 \begin_layout Labeling
17358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17360 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
17365 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
17366 the language of the document.
17367 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17368 workarea in blue to
17369 indicate the change
17370 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
17371 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
17373 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
17375 \begin_inset Newline newline
17378 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17380 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17381 When using the spell checking (see section
17382 \begin_inset space ~
17386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17388 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17392 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17393 \begin_inset Newline newline
17396 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17398 Exclude from Spellchecking
17401 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17402 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
17406 \begin_layout Labeling
17407 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17412 Alters the size of the font.
17414 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
17416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
17420 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
17423 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
17424 document font size.
17425 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
17426 the details, but a general description of what
17432 \begin_layout Labeling
17433 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17454 arg "font-size tiny"
17460 \begin_layout Labeling
17461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 arg "font-size scriptsize"
17488 \begin_layout Labeling
17489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17510 arg "font-size footnotesize"
17516 \begin_layout Labeling
17517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17538 arg "font-size small"
17544 \begin_layout Labeling
17545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17559 It's also the default size.
17563 arg "font-size normal"
17569 \begin_layout Labeling
17570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17591 arg "font-size large"
17597 \begin_layout Labeling
17598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17619 arg "font-size larger"
17625 \begin_layout Labeling
17626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17647 arg "font-size largest"
17653 \begin_layout Labeling
17654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17675 arg "font-size huge"
17681 \begin_layout Labeling
17682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17703 arg "font-size giant"
17709 \begin_layout Labeling
17710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17715 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
17716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 arg "font-size increase"
17741 \begin_layout Labeling
17742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17747 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
17748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17767 arg "font-size decrease"
17773 \begin_layout Standard
17778 : don't go crazy with this feature.
17779 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17781 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
17782 — use those instead.
17783 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17784 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
17789 \begin_layout Standard
17791 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
17792 Another combo box allows to tweak
17799 \begin_layout Labeling
17800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17802 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17807 Alters the text color.
17808 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17813 , which means that the document default color set in
17815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17816 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 \begin_inset space ~
17827 is used, you can select
17904 \begin_inset Index idx
17909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17911 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17915 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17920 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
17938 \begin_layout Labeling
17939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17941 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
17945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
17951 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
17952 change a few other things at the character level
17953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
17954 have text passages being underlined
17958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
17959 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
17960 days, when you could not change fonts.
17961 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17962 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17963 because some people
17967 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17974 \begin_layout Labeling
17975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17977 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
17984 This is text with emphasize on
17987 This might seem like the same as
17991 , but it is actually a bit different.
17997 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
17999 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18004 \begin_layout Labeling
18005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18012 Don't use underlining.
18017 \begin_layout Labeling
18018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18024 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18032 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18034 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18043 arg "font-underline"
18049 \begin_inset Newline newline
18053 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18056 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18057 when you could not change fonts.
18058 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18059 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18060 because some people
18064 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18069 \begin_layout Labeling
18070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18074 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18076 \begin_inset space ~
18085 This is text with Double under
18086 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
18088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
18097 arg "font-underunderline"
18101 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
18103 \begin_inset Newline newline
18106 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
18107 about double underbar
18112 \begin_layout Labeling
18113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
18119 \begin_inset space ~
18128 This is text with Wavy under
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
18131 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
18140 arg "font-underwave"
18144 \begin_inset Newline newline
18147 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
18148 Keep antinausea pills handy.
18149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
18154 \begin_layout Labeling
18155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18157 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
18162 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
18168 \begin_layout Labeling
18169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18171 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
18176 Don't use strikethrough.
18179 \begin_layout Labeling
18180 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18184 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
18198 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
18200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
18201 Single strikethrough
18209 arg "font-strikeout"
18213 \begin_inset Newline newline
18216 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
18217 changed in the meantime.
18220 \begin_layout Labeling
18221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18223 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
18227 \begin_inset space ~
18231 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18237 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
18245 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
18247 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
18253 \begin_inset Newline newline
18256 This is used to make text hardly readable.
18260 \begin_layout Standard
18262 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
18263 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
18266 \begin_layout Labeling
18267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18269 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
18274 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
18275 the language of the document.
18276 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18277 workarea in blue to
18278 indicate the change.
18279 \begin_inset Newline newline
18282 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18284 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18285 When using the spell checking (see section
18286 \begin_inset space ~
18290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18292 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18296 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18297 \begin_inset Newline newline
18300 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
18302 Exclude from Spellchecking
18305 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18308 \begin_layout Standard
18310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
18311 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
18312 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18319 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
18324 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
18328 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
18334 \begin_layout Itemize
18336 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
18343 This is text with emphasize on
18348 \begin_layout Itemize
18352 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
18359 This is text with Noun on.
18361 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
18368 , this is a logical attribute.
18369 Normally it's equivalent to
18372 \begin_inset space ~
18382 \begin_layout Standard
18383 So you have a huge number of combinations to
18384 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
18386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
18391 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
18392 chosen a new character style
18393 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
18394 applied a text property
18397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
18400 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
18402 \begin_inset space ~
18405 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
18413 arg "dialog-show character"
18419 arg "dialog-show character"
18422 ) dialog, the settings are
18423 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
18427 You can activate the
18428 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
18430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
18431 last applied properties
18433 by using the toolbar button
18436 arg "textstyle-apply"
18440 The button lets you apply
18441 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
18442 your custom character style
18443 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
18446 even when the dialog isn't visible.
18448 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
18449 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
18450 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
18451 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
18456 \begin_layout Standard
18457 To completely reset the
18458 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
18460 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
18461 text properties of a selection
18463 to the default, use
18464 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
18466 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
18476 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
18481 from the menu of the toolbar button
18484 arg "textstyle-apply"
18491 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
18492 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
18493 you just set the shape to
18494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18526 \begin_layout Standard
18528 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18529 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
18537 \begin_inset space ~
18549 \begin_layout Itemize
18551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18564 font, which means every character has the same width; the
18565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18582 \begin_inset Newline newline
18586 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
18589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18600 \begin_inset Note Note
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 For more on phantoms see section
18605 \begin_inset space ~
18609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18611 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
18621 \begin_inset Newline newline
18627 \begin_layout Itemize
18629 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18634 fonts use characters with serifs.
18635 These are the small
18636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18643 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
18644 The following example shows the difference:
18645 \begin_inset Newline newline
18649 \begin_inset Newline newline
18654 text without serifs
18657 \begin_inset Newline newline
18660 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
18661 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
18668 \begin_layout Itemize
18670 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
18675 is not recommended for use as a base type.
18676 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
18677 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
18682 \begin_layout Standard
18684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
18685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18692 refers to applying or removing font properties.
18693 When a property is marked for toggling in the
18696 \begin_inset space ~
18701 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
18702 the property to be removed.
18703 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
18704 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
18705 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
18708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18723 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
18724 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
18725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18732 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18741 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
18744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18752 If you, for example, set
18753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18771 \begin_inset space ~
18776 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
18778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18785 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
18790 \begin_layout Standard
18792 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
18795 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
18796 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
18799 \begin_layout Section
18800 Printing and Previewing
18803 \begin_layout Subsection
18807 \begin_layout Standard
18808 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
18809 using \SpecialChar LyX
18810 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
18811 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
18812 goes on behind-the-scenes.
18813 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
18815 Additional Features
18820 \begin_layout Standard
18822 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
18825 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
18826 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
18827 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18830 is what you use to do your actual writing.
18831 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
18832 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18833 to turn your writing into printable output.
18834 This happens in two stages:
18837 \begin_layout Enumerate
18838 First, \SpecialChar LyX
18839 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
18841 a file with the extension,
18842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18856 \begin_layout Enumerate
18857 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
18858 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18859 to use the commands in the
18863 file to produce printable output.
18866 \begin_layout Subsection
18867 Output file formats
18868 \begin_inset Index idx
18873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18882 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18891 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
18893 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
18897 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
18901 \begin_inset Index idx
18906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
18915 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
18931 \begin_layout Standard
18932 This file type has the extension
18933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18945 It contains your document as plain text
18946 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
18948 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
18949 following the rules of the
18950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18953 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
18954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18962 \begin_layout Standard
18963 You can export your document to
18964 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
18966 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
18971 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18972 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18974 \begin_inset space ~
18980 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
18981 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
18982 bibliography (section
18983 \begin_inset space ~
18987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18989 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
18994 If your document includes such material, use
18996 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18997 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_inset space ~
19019 \begin_inset space ~
19025 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
19026 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19027 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19029 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19038 \begin_inset Index idx
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19063 \begin_layout Standard
19064 This file type has the extension
19065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19076 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19079 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
19080 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
19081 -Errors or to process it manually
19082 with console commands.
19083 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
19084 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
19085 's temporary directory whenever you
19086 view or export your document.
19089 \begin_layout Standard
19090 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19091 -file using the menu
19093 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19094 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19098 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
19099 export variants are explained in section
19100 \begin_inset space ~
19104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19106 reference "subsec:Export"
19113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19115 \begin_inset Index idx
19120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19139 \begin_layout Standard
19140 This file type has the extension
19141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19161 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
19162 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
19163 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
19167 \begin_layout Standard
19168 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
19169 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
19170 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
19171 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
19172 when you view the DVI.
19173 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
19176 \begin_layout Standard
19177 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
19179 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19180 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19185 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19186 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19188 \begin_inset space ~
19194 The latter option uses the program
19196 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19202 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19205 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
19206 font access (see section
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19213 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19218 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19219 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
19224 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19226 \begin_inset Index idx
19231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19233 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19250 \begin_layout Standard
19251 This file type has the extension
19252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19264 PostScript was developed by the company
19268 as a printer language.
19269 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
19271 PostScript can be seen as a
19272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19275 programming language
19276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19279 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
19283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19284 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19291 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19299 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19318 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
19321 \begin_layout Standard
19322 PostScript can only contain images in the format
19323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19326 Encapsulated PostScript
19327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19330 (EPS, file extension
19331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19343 As \SpecialChar LyX
19344 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
19345 convert them in the background to EPS.
19346 If, for example, you have 50
19347 \begin_inset space ~
19350 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
19352 \begin_inset space ~
19355 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
19356 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
19358 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
19359 EPS to avoid this problem.
19362 \begin_layout Standard
19363 You can export to PostScript using the menu
19365 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19366 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19374 \begin_inset Index idx
19379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 \begin_inset Index idx
19401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 \begin_layout Standard
19411 This file type has the extension
19412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19428 Portable Document Format
19429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19436 was derived from PostScript.
19437 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
19439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19446 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
19447 looks exactly the same.
19450 \begin_layout Standard
19451 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
19452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19455 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19459 (JPG, file extension
19460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19487 Portable Network Graphics
19488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19491 (PNG, file extension
19492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19504 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
19505 converts them in the
19506 background to one of these formats.
19507 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
19508 will slow down your workflow.
19509 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
19512 \begin_layout Standard
19513 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
19515 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19521 \begin_layout Description
19523 \begin_inset space ~
19526 (pdflatex) This uses the program
19530 which converts your file directly to PDF.
19533 \begin_layout Description
19535 \begin_inset space ~
19542 ) This uses the program
19544 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19547 which converts your file directly to PDF.
19550 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19553 is a new engine, derived from
19557 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
19558 access (see section
19559 \begin_inset space ~
19563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19565 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19570 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
19571 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
19576 \begin_layout Description
19578 \begin_inset space ~
19585 ) This uses the program
19590 that converts your file directly to PDF.
19596 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
19597 font access (see section
19598 \begin_inset space ~
19602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19604 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
19609 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
19610 vertically written Japanese.
19613 \begin_layout Description
19615 \begin_inset space ~
19618 (cropped) This is the same as
19621 \begin_inset space ~
19626 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
19627 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
19628 to generate good-looking
19629 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
19632 \begin_layout Description
19634 \begin_inset space ~
19637 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
19641 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
19645 \begin_layout Description
19647 \begin_inset space ~
19650 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
19654 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
19655 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
19659 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
19660 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
19663 \begin_layout Standard
19667 \begin_inset space ~
19676 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
19677 works without problems.
19678 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
19679 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
19683 \begin_inset space ~
19691 \begin_inset space ~
19696 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
19704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19706 \begin_inset Index idx
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 \begin_inset Index idx
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 \begin_layout Standard
19743 This file type has the extension
19744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19756 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
19757 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
19758 When \SpecialChar LyX
19759 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
19760 suitable for the purpose.
19761 For the math output you can choose in the menu
19763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19764 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19767 between different formats, which are described in section
19769 Math Output in XHTML
19774 \begin_inset space ~
19782 \begin_layout Standard
19783 XHTML output remains
19784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19791 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
19792 features are supported yet.
19796 and the World Wide Web
19800 Additional Features
19802 manual, for more information.
19805 \begin_layout Standard
19806 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
19808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19809 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19815 \begin_layout Subsection
19817 \begin_inset Index idx
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 \begin_layout Standard
19842 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
19843 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
19852 or use the toolbar button
19859 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
19860 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
19861 \begin_inset space ~
19865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19867 reference "sec:File-Formats"
19871 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
19873 \begin_inset space ~
19877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19879 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
19884 Further output formats can be selected via
19886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19887 View (Other Formats)
19889 or the toolbar button
19898 \begin_layout Standard
19899 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
19900 viewer window using the menu
19902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19908 Update (Other Formats)
19913 \begin_layout Standard
19914 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
19917 To have a real output, export your document.
19920 \begin_layout Section
19921 A few Words about Typography
19922 \begin_inset Index idx
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 \begin_layout Subsection
19937 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
19938 \begin_inset Index idx
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 \begin_inset Index idx
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 \begin_layout Standard
19965 In \SpecialChar LyX
19967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19978 symbol comes in four variants: the
19995 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20001 \begin_layout Standard
20002 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20012 height_special "totalheight"
20017 backgroundcolor "none"
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 \begin_inset Tabular
20022 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
20023 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20025 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20026 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20027 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20057 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20096 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 system key combination
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
20127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20136 and the em dash with
20139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20152 is the Mac label for the right
20162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20175 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20198 system key combination or
20199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 \begin_inset Formula $-$
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20265 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20271 \begin_layout Standard
20272 Dashes can also be inserted with
20274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20276 \begin_inset space ~
20279 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
20287 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
20288 and 2014 for the en dash).
20291 \begin_layout Standard
20292 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
20293 mode and has a length of its own.
20294 Here are some examples:
20297 \begin_layout Enumerate
20298 line- and page-breaks
20299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20309 \begin_layout Enumerate
20311 \begin_inset space ~
20315 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20325 \begin_layout Enumerate
20326 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
20327 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20337 \begin_layout Enumerate
20338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
20342 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
20352 \begin_layout Standard
20354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
20356 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
20357 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
20365 \begin_layout Subsection
20366 Dashes and Line Breaks
20367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20369 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
20376 \begin_layout Standard
20377 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
20378 case and locale, e.
20379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20385 \begin_layout Itemize
20386 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
20387 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
20390 \begin_layout Itemize
20391 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
20395 \begin_layout Itemize
20396 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
20397 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
20400 \begin_layout Standard
20401 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
20402 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20413 allows line breaks after hyphens
20414 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
20416 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
20419 en-dashes and em-dashes.
20422 \begin_layout Enumerate
20423 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
20424 \begin_inset space ~
20427 – common in British English and generally recommended by
20429 The Elements of Typographic Style
20432 \begin_inset space ~
20435 – can be prevented using
20436 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
20438 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
20444 \begin_layout Enumerate
20445 Unwanted line breaks
20450 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
20452 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
20455 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 Prevent Hyphenation
20467 \begin_inset space ~
20483 in \SpecialChar TeX
20485 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
20487 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
20489 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
20491 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
20492 space does not suffice
20496 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20503 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
20504 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
20505 in the document language.
20506 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
20520 \begin_layout Itemize
20522 \begin_inset space ~
20526 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20536 height_special "totalheight"
20541 backgroundcolor "none"
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 \begin_layout Itemize
20555 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20565 height_special "totalheight"
20570 backgroundcolor "none"
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 \begin_inset space ~
20583 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
20584 \begin_inset space ~
20587 – sont très utiles.
20590 \begin_layout Itemize
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
20608 \begin_layout Standard
20609 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
20610 \begin_inset space ~
20613 – in contrast to an overfull line
20614 \begin_inset space ~
20617 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20621 \begin_layout Standard
20622 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
20625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20626 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20627 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
20628 Disallow line breaks after dashes
20633 \begin_layout Enumerate
20634 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
20635 They can be prevented using
20636 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
20638 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
20641 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
20647 \begin_layout Itemize
20649 \begin_inset space ~
20652 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
20653 \begin_inset space ~
20656 – sont très utiles.
20660 \begin_layout Enumerate
20661 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
20662 \begin_inset Newline newline
20667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20670 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
20672 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
20674 \begin_inset space ~
20680 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
20682 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
20684 \begin_inset space ~
20695 \begin_layout Itemize
20696 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
20697 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
20698 should be followed by
20699 a line break opportunity.
20702 \begin_layout Standard
20703 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
20704 \begin_inset space ~
20708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20710 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
20721 \begin_layout Enumerate
20722 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
20723 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
20724 or en dashes (see section
20725 \begin_inset space ~
20729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20731 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
20741 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20742 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
20745 \begin_layout Standard
20746 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
20748 \begin_inset space ~
20751 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
20752 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
20754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20761 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
20762 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
20770 \begin_layout Standard
20771 Since \SpecialChar LyX
20773 \begin_inset space ~
20776 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20778 prevents ligation to dashes.
20780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20787 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
20792 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
20793 after the input (unless the current text font is
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 The behavior was changed since
20803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20818 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
20819 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
20820 as non-breakable dashes.
20821 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
20829 \begin_layout Standard
20832 \begin_inset space ~
20840 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20845 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
20848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20849 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20850 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
20851 Disallow line breaks after dashes
20853 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
20857 If you used both literal and
20858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20865 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
20867 \begin_inset space ~
20870 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
20871 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
20874 \begin_layout Subsection
20876 \begin_inset Index idx
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20890 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
20897 \begin_layout Standard
20898 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
20899 but automatically in the output.
20900 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20906 \begin_inset Index idx
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 following the rules of the document language.
20930 does not hyphenate text in the
20934 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
20937 \begin_layout Standard
20939 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
20943 font and with unusual constructs, like
20944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20952 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
20953 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
20954 This is done with the menu
20956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20957 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20959 \begin_inset space ~
20965 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20967 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
20971 \begin_layout Standard
20972 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
20973 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
20975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20984 would then see the hyphen
20985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20992 as a line break possibility.
20993 A line break at this point would look ugly.
20994 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a
20995 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
20997 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21003 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21005 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
21007 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
21012 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
21014 Prevent Hyphenation
21019 \begin_inset space ~
21027 \begin_layout Subsection
21029 \begin_inset Index idx
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21044 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
21045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21047 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
21054 \begin_layout Standard
21055 When \SpecialChar LyX
21056 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
21057 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
21059 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
21062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21065 appropriate amount of space.
21066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21069 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
21071 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
21072 gets after another word.
21075 \begin_layout Standard
21076 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
21077 not work in all cases.
21079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21090 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
21091 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
21094 \begin_layout Standard
21095 Here are some examples of
21099 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
21102 \begin_layout Itemize
21107 \begin_layout Itemize
21112 \begin_layout Standard
21113 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
21116 \begin_layout Itemize
21118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21122 this is too much space!
21125 \begin_layout Itemize
21130 \begin_layout Standard
21131 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
21134 \begin_layout Standard
21135 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
21138 \begin_layout Enumerate
21142 \begin_inset space ~
21147 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
21148 \begin_inset space ~
21152 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
21154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21156 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
21161 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
21163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21165 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
21172 \begin_inset Index idx
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 \begin_layout Enumerate
21200 \begin_inset space ~
21205 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
21206 \begin_inset space ~
21210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21212 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
21217 \begin_inset Index idx
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 \begin_layout Enumerate
21245 \begin_inset space ~
21249 \begin_inset space ~
21253 \begin_inset space ~
21260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21262 \begin_inset space ~
21267 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
21268 This function is also bound to
21271 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
21277 \begin_layout Standard
21278 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
21281 \begin_layout Itemize
21283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21287 \begin_inset space \space{}
21290 this is too much space!
21293 \begin_layout Itemize
21294 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
21298 \begin_layout Standard
21299 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
21300 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
21302 will take care of this.
21305 \begin_layout Standard
21306 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
21310 \begin_inset space ~
21316 feature described in the section
21318 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
21323 Additional Features
21328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21330 \begin_inset Index idx
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 \begin_inset Index idx
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 \begin_layout Standard
21378 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
21379 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
21380 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
21382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21390 The keyboard character,
21394 , generates this automatically.
21397 \begin_layout Standard
21398 You can specify what character the
21402 key produces by using the submenu
21408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21412 \begin_inset Index idx
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21419 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 dialog and switching the
21437 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
21438 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
21440 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
21442 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
21446 \begin_inset space ~
21452 \begin_layout Labeling
21453 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21465 \begin_inset space ~
21469 \begin_inset space ~
21473 \begin_inset Quotes els
21477 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21491 \begin_inset Quotes els
21495 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21498 quotation marks (as common, e.
21499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21505 \begin_layout Labeling
21506 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21509 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21513 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21517 \begin_inset space ~
21521 \begin_inset space ~
21525 \begin_inset Quotes sls
21529 \begin_inset Quotes srs
21535 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21539 \begin_inset Quotes sld
21543 \begin_inset Quotes sls
21547 \begin_inset Quotes srs
21550 quotation marks (as common, e.
21551 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21557 \begin_layout Labeling
21558 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21561 \begin_inset Quotes gld
21565 \begin_inset Quotes grd
21569 \begin_inset space ~
21573 \begin_inset space ~
21577 \begin_inset Quotes gls
21581 \begin_inset Quotes grs
21587 \begin_inset Quotes gld
21591 \begin_inset Quotes grd
21595 \begin_inset Quotes gls
21599 \begin_inset Quotes grs
21602 quotation marks (as common, e.
21603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21609 \begin_layout Labeling
21610 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21613 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21617 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21621 \begin_inset space ~
21625 \begin_inset space ~
21629 \begin_inset Quotes pls
21633 \begin_inset Quotes prs
21639 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21643 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21647 \begin_inset Quotes pls
21651 \begin_inset Quotes prs
21654 quotation marks (as common, e.
21655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21661 \begin_layout Labeling
21662 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21665 \begin_inset Quotes cld
21669 \begin_inset Quotes crd
21673 \begin_inset space ~
21677 \begin_inset space ~
21681 \begin_inset Quotes cls
21685 \begin_inset Quotes crs
21691 \begin_inset Quotes cld
21695 \begin_inset Quotes crd
21699 \begin_inset Quotes cls
21703 \begin_inset Quotes crs
21706 quotation marks (as common, e.
21707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21710 g., in Switzerland)
21713 \begin_layout Labeling
21714 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21717 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21721 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21725 \begin_inset space ~
21729 \begin_inset space ~
21733 \begin_inset Quotes als
21737 \begin_inset Quotes ars
21743 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21747 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21751 \begin_inset Quotes als
21755 \begin_inset Quotes ars
21758 quotation marks (as common, e.
21759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21765 \begin_layout Labeling
21766 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21769 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21773 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21777 \begin_inset space ~
21781 \begin_inset space ~
21785 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21789 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21795 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21799 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
21803 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21807 \begin_inset Quotes qls
21810 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
21813 \begin_layout Labeling
21814 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21817 \begin_inset Quotes bld
21821 \begin_inset Quotes brd
21825 \begin_inset space ~
21829 \begin_inset space ~
21833 \begin_inset Quotes bls
21837 \begin_inset Quotes brs
21843 \begin_inset Quotes bld
21847 \begin_inset Quotes brd
21851 \begin_inset Quotes bls
21855 \begin_inset Quotes brs
21858 quotation marks (as common, e.
21859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21862 g., in Great Britain)
21865 \begin_layout Labeling
21866 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21869 \begin_inset Quotes fld
21873 \begin_inset Quotes frd
21877 \begin_inset space ~
21881 \begin_inset space ~
21885 \begin_inset Quotes fls
21889 \begin_inset Quotes frs
21895 \begin_inset Quotes fld
21899 \begin_inset Quotes frd
21903 \begin_inset Quotes fls
21907 \begin_inset Quotes frs
21910 quotation marks (as common, e.
21911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21917 \begin_layout Labeling
21918 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21921 \begin_inset Quotes ild
21925 \begin_inset Quotes ird
21929 \begin_inset space ~
21933 \begin_inset space ~
21937 \begin_inset Quotes ils
21941 \begin_inset Quotes irs
21947 \begin_inset Quotes ild
21951 \begin_inset Quotes ird
21955 \begin_inset Quotes ils
21959 \begin_inset Quotes irs
21962 quotation marks (another style common in France)
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21967 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
21968 since these look identical to the inner marks.
21969 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
21970 the inner marks differ).
21978 \begin_layout Labeling
21979 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21982 \begin_inset Quotes rld
21986 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
21990 \begin_inset space ~
21994 \begin_inset space ~
21998 \begin_inset Quotes rls
22002 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
22008 \begin_inset Quotes rld
22012 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
22016 \begin_inset Quotes rls
22020 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
22023 quotation marks (as common, e.
22024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22030 \begin_layout Labeling
22031 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22034 \begin_inset Quotes wld
22038 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22046 \begin_inset space ~
22050 \begin_inset Quotes wls
22054 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
22060 \begin_inset Quotes wld
22064 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
22068 \begin_inset Quotes wls
22072 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
22075 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
22076 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
22080 \begin_layout Labeling
22081 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22083 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
22086 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22090 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22094 \begin_inset space ~
22098 \begin_inset space ~
22102 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22106 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22114 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22122 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22130 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22138 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22143 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
22148 \begin_layout Labeling
22149 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22150 \begin_inset Quotes jld
22158 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
22164 \begin_inset space ~
22168 \begin_inset space ~
22174 \begin_inset Quotes jls
22182 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
22186 \begin_inset Quotes jld
22190 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
22194 \begin_inset Quotes jls
22198 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
22201 quotation marks (as common, e.
22202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
22212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22214 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
22220 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
22221 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
22229 \begin_layout Labeling
22230 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22231 \begin_inset Quotes kld
22239 \begin_inset Quotes krd
22245 \begin_inset space ~
22249 \begin_inset space ~
22255 \begin_inset Quotes kls
22263 \begin_inset Quotes krs
22267 \begin_inset Quotes kld
22271 \begin_inset Quotes krd
22275 \begin_inset Quotes kls
22279 \begin_inset Quotes krs
22282 quotation marks (as common, e.
22283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22286 g., in North Korea and China)
22287 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
22289 \begin_inset script superscript
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
22294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22296 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
22311 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
22318 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
22328 \begin_layout Standard
22329 Inner quotation marks
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
22335 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
22336 case (and specifically the British style shows that
22337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22344 does not necessarily mean
22345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22353 This is why we call them
22354 \begin_inset Quotes els
22358 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22374 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
22376 \begin_inset Quotes els
22380 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22383 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
22386 arg "quote-insert inner"
22391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22397 \begin_layout Standard
22398 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
22399 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
22400 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
22401 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
22402 If you check the setting
22404 Use dynamic quotation marks
22408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22409 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22412 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
22413 they appear in a special color).
22414 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
22415 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
22417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22420 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
22423 \begin_layout Standard
22424 Individual quotation marks (i.
22425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22428 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
22429 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
22433 \begin_layout Subsection
22435 \begin_inset Index idx
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 \begin_inset Index idx
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22481 name "subsec:Ligatures"
22488 \begin_layout Standard
22489 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
22490 print them as single characters.
22491 These groups are known as
22496 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
22497 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
22499 Here are the standard ligatures:
22502 \begin_layout Itemize
22506 \begin_layout Itemize
22510 \begin_layout Itemize
22514 \begin_layout Itemize
22518 \begin_layout Itemize
22522 \begin_layout Standard
22523 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
22526 \begin_layout Standard
22527 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
22528 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
22529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22536 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
22537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22552 To break a ligature, use
22554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22555 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22557 \begin_inset space ~
22564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22575 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
22577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22592 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
22594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22600 \begin_layout Subsection
22602 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
22604 \begin_inset Index idx
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 \begin_layout Standard
22632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22633 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
22637 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
22640 \begin_layout Description
22642 The name of the game.
22645 \begin_layout Description
22647 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
22651 \begin_layout Description
22653 The \SpecialChar TeX
22654 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
22658 \begin_layout Description
22659 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
22660 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
22664 \begin_layout Standard
22665 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22671 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
22675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22679 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
22680 world to give programs geek version numbers.
22681 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
22682 converges to the number
22683 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
22686 : The actual version is
22687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22695 , the previous one was
22696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22707 \begin_layout Subsection
22709 \begin_inset Index idx
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22733 \begin_layout Standard
22734 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
22735 space between two words.
22736 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
22739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22746 for units use the menu
22748 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22749 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22751 \begin_inset space ~
22759 arg "space-insert thin"
22765 \begin_layout Standard
22766 Here is an example to show the differences:
22769 \begin_layout Standard
22770 \begin_inset Tabular
22771 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
22772 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22773 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
22774 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
22776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 \begin_inset space ~
22785 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22797 space between number and unit
22804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22813 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
22821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 half space between number and unit
22838 \begin_layout Subsection
22840 \begin_inset Index idx
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 \begin_layout Standard
22865 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
22867 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
22868 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
22869 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
22870 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
22871 These bits of text became known as
22882 \begin_layout Standard
22883 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
22884 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
22885 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
22886 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
22887 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
22888 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
22889 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
22890 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
22891 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
22892 \begin_inset Newline newline
22900 \begin_inset Newline newline
22908 \begin_inset Newline newline
22911 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22912 preamble of your document to avoid them.
22913 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
22915 \begin_inset space ~
22919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
22921 key "latexcompanion"
22927 \begin_inset space ~
22931 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
22938 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
22939 's page break mechanism.
22942 \begin_layout Chapter
22943 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
22944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22946 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
22953 \begin_layout Standard
22954 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22957 \begin_inset space ~
22963 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22966 \begin_layout Section
22968 \begin_inset Index idx
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22989 \begin_layout Standard
22991 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
22994 \begin_layout Description
22997 \begin_inset space ~
23000 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
23001 \begin_inset Newline newline
23005 \begin_inset Note Note
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
23017 \begin_layout Description
23018 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
23019 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
23020 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
23023 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
23024 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
23026 \begin_inset space ~
23032 \begin_inset Newline newline
23036 \begin_inset Note Comment
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
23049 \begin_layout Description
23051 \begin_inset space ~
23054 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
23055 set in the document settings under
23057 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
23059 \begin_inset space ~
23065 \begin_inset Newline newline
23069 \begin_inset Newline newline
23073 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
23083 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
23088 of a comment that appears in the output.
23094 \begin_inset Newline newline
23098 \begin_inset Newline newline
23101 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
23104 \begin_layout Standard
23105 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
23113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23117 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
23120 \begin_layout Section
23122 \begin_inset Index idx
23127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23136 name "sec:Footnotes"
23143 \begin_layout Standard
23145 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
23148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23151 or the toolbar button
23154 arg "footnote-insert"
23166 \begin_inset Graphics
23167 filename clipart/footnote.png
23176 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
23177 's representation of your footnote.
23187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23206 label, the box will
23210 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
23211 Clicking on the box label again will close
23224 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
23225 and click on the footnote
23240 \begin_layout Standard
23241 Here is an example footnote:
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
23258 \begin_layout Standard
23259 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
23260 position where the footnote box is placed.
23261 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
23262 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
23263 according to the document class.
23265 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
23266 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23272 ey are described in the
23275 \begin_inset space ~
23283 \begin_layout Section
23285 \begin_inset Index idx
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23299 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
23306 \begin_layout Standard
23307 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
23309 When you insert a margin note via the menu
23311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23313 \begin_inset space ~
23318 or the toolbar button
23321 arg "marginalnote-insert"
23340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23347 appearing within your text.
23348 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
23349 's representation of your margin
23358 \begin_layout Standard
23359 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
23363 \begin_inset Marginal
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 This is a marginal note.
23376 \begin_layout Standard
23377 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
23378 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
23379 pages, right on odd pages.
23382 \begin_layout Standard
23383 For further information about marginal notes see the section
23386 \begin_inset space ~
23394 \begin_inset space ~
23402 \begin_layout Section
23403 Graphics and Images
23404 \begin_inset Index idx
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 \begin_inset Index idx
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23430 name "sec:Graphics"
23437 \begin_layout Standard
23438 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
23439 you want and click on the toolbar icon
23442 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23451 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23455 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
23460 tab allows you to choose your image file.
23461 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
23463 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
23464 \begin_inset space ~
23468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23470 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
23477 \begin_layout Standard
23482 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
23483 of the image in the output.
23484 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
23488 \begin_inset space ~
23492 \begin_inset space ~
23501 \begin_inset space ~
23505 \begin_inset space ~
23509 \begin_inset space ~
23514 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
23515 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
23523 \begin_layout Standard
23527 \begin_inset space ~
23531 \begin_inset space ~
23536 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
23537 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
23539 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
23544 \begin_inset space ~
23549 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
23550 with the image size is printed.
23553 \begin_layout Standard
23554 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
23555 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
23557 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
23560 \begin_layout Standard
23562 \begin_inset Graphics
23563 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
23571 \begin_layout Standard
23572 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
23573 the image into a float, see section
23574 \begin_inset space ~
23578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23580 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23587 \begin_layout Subsection
23589 \begin_inset Index idx
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23613 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
23620 \begin_layout Standard
23621 You can insert images in any known file format.
23622 But as we explained in section
23623 \begin_inset space ~
23627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23629 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
23633 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
23635 therefore uses the program
23639 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
23640 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
23641 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
23642 \begin_inset space ~
23646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23648 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
23655 \begin_layout Standard
23656 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
23659 \begin_layout Description
23661 \begin_inset space ~
23664 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
23665 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
23666 Well-known bitmap image formats are
23667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23670 Graphics Interchange Format
23671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23674 (GIF, file extension
23675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23687 \begin_inset Index idx
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23712 Portable Network Graphics
23713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23716 (PNG, file extension
23717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23729 \begin_inset Index idx
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23754 Joint Photographic Experts Group
23755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23758 (JPG, file extension
23759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23783 \begin_inset Index idx
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 \begin_layout Description
23809 \begin_inset space ~
23812 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
23814 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
23815 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
23816 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
23817 \begin_inset Newline newline
23820 Scalable image formats can be
23821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23824 Scalable Vector Graphics
23825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23828 (SVG, file extension
23829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23841 \begin_inset Index idx
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23866 Encapsulated PostScript
23867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23870 (EPS, file extension
23871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23883 \begin_inset Index idx
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23908 Portable Document Format
23909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23912 (PDF, file extension
23913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23925 \begin_inset Index idx
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23945 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
23946 result will not be scalable.
23947 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
23961 \begin_layout Standard
23962 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
23969 \begin_layout Subsection
23970 Grouping of Image Settings
23971 \begin_inset Index idx
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 \begin_layout Standard
23996 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
23998 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
23999 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
24001 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
24002 need to manually change each of them.
24005 \begin_layout Standard
24006 A new group can be set by pressing the button
24009 \begin_inset space ~
24013 \begin_inset space ~
24025 \begin_inset space ~
24029 \begin_inset space ~
24035 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
24036 and checking the name of the desired group.
24039 \begin_layout Section
24041 \begin_inset Index idx
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24062 \begin_layout Standard
24063 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
24066 arg "tabular-insert"
24071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24075 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
24076 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
24077 , and you can select a specific (border) style
24080 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
24081 from the rest of the table.
24082 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
24083 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
24085 Here is an example table:
24088 \begin_layout Standard
24090 \begin_inset Tabular
24091 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
24092 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24095 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
24096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
24294 \begin_layout Standard
24296 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
24297 This corresponds to the
24298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24305 table style listed in the style selection.
24308 \begin_layout Standard
24310 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
24311 Other available styles include:
24314 \begin_layout Itemize
24316 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
24318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24325 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
24329 \begin_layout Itemize
24331 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
24332 a border-less table with no lines at all,
24335 \begin_layout Itemize
24337 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
24339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24346 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
24347 bold top/bottom lines (see
24357 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
24358 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
24364 \begin_layout Standard
24366 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
24367 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
24368 button can be changed in
24370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24371 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
24375 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
24379 \begin_layout Subsection
24383 \begin_layout Standard
24384 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
24387 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
24391 This brings up the table dialog.
24392 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
24393 cursor is placed currently.
24394 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
24395 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
24396 done on all of your selection.
24399 \begin_layout Standard
24400 In addition to the table dialog, the
24403 \begin_inset space ~
24408 helps you in setting table properties.
24409 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
24412 \begin_layout Standard
24416 \begin_inset space ~
24421 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
24422 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
24423 current cell respectively.
24424 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
24426 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
24427 of text, see section
24428 \begin_inset space ~
24432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24434 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
24441 \begin_layout Standard
24442 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
24443 using the check box
24452 This will merge the cells to
24456 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
24457 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
24458 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
24459 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
24460 in the last row without the upper border:
24463 \begin_layout Standard
24465 \begin_inset Tabular
24466 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
24467 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
24468 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24469 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
24470 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
24471 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24567 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 \begin_layout Standard
24603 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24604 -arguments for the table.
24605 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
24606 explained in the chapter
24613 \begin_inset space ~
24619 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
24620 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
24621 but are visible in the output.
24624 \begin_layout Standard
24625 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24633 Most DVI-viewers are
24637 able to display rotations.
24645 \begin_layout Standard
24650 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
24655 adds lines for all cell borders.
24658 \begin_layout Subsection
24660 \begin_inset Index idx
24665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 \begin_inset Index idx
24687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 \begin_layout Standard
24697 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
24700 \begin_inset space ~
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24712 \begin_inset space ~
24717 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
24718 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
24721 \begin_layout Description
24726 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
24727 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
24728 Except for the first page, if
24731 \begin_inset space ~
24739 \begin_layout Description
24743 \begin_inset space ~
24748 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
24749 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
24752 \begin_layout Description
24757 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
24758 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
24759 except for the last page, if
24762 \begin_inset space ~
24770 \begin_layout Description
24774 \begin_inset space ~
24779 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
24780 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
24783 \begin_layout Description
24784 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
24785 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
24787 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24791 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
24794 \begin_inset space ~
24802 \begin_layout Standard
24803 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
24804 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
24805 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
24811 In this context, first means first in this order:
24814 \begin_inset space ~
24826 \begin_inset space ~
24831 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
24834 \begin_layout Standard
24836 \begin_inset Tabular
24837 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
24838 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
24839 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
24840 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24841 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24842 <row endfirsthead="true">
24843 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
24854 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 <row endfirsthead="true">
24874 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24894 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24906 <row endhead="true">
24907 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24918 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 <row endhead="true">
24938 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24949 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24958 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24970 <row endfoot="true">
24971 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25022 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25963 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25972 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25981 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25992 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26023 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26054 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26085 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26178 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26209 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26240 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26271 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26302 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26333 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26364 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26395 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26426 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26519 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26550 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26612 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26674 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26705 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 <row endlastfoot="true">
26953 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26964 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
26967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26973 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26990 \begin_layout Subsection
26992 \begin_inset Index idx
26997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26999 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27016 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
27025 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
27026 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
27027 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
27031 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
27034 \begin_layout Standard
27035 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
27036 for the column in the table dialog.
27037 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
27038 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
27042 \begin_layout Standard
27044 \begin_inset Tabular
27045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
27046 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27048 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
27049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27069 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
27143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27194 This is longer now.
27199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
27251 This is longer now.
27256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27282 \begin_layout Standard
27283 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
27284 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
27288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
27290 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
27295 Selection with the mouse or with
27299 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
27300 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
27301 the selection from outside the table.
27304 \begin_layout Section
27306 \begin_inset Index idx
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27327 \begin_layout Subsection
27331 \begin_layout Standard
27332 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
27333 have a fixed location.
27335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27342 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
27350 \begin_inset space ~
27355 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
27356 too many notes on the current page.
27359 \begin_layout Standard
27360 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
27361 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
27362 and pages without text.
27363 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
27364 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
27365 Floats are therefore numbered.
27366 Referencing is described in section
27367 \begin_inset space ~
27371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27373 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27380 \begin_layout Standard
27381 To insert a float, use the menu
27383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27387 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
27388 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
27390 After the label you can insert the caption text.
27391 \begin_inset Index idx
27396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
27413 paragraph within the float.
27414 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
27415 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
27416 left-clicking on the box label.
27417 A closed float box looks like this:
27418 \begin_inset Graphics
27419 filename clipart/float.png
27424 – a gray button with a red label.
27427 \begin_layout Standard
27428 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
27430 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
27433 \begin_layout Subsection
27435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27437 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
27442 \begin_inset Index idx
27447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27449 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27468 \begin_inset space ~
27472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27474 reference "fig:A-star-in"
27478 was created using the menu
27480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27481 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 arg "float-insert figure"
27491 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
27494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27500 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
27504 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
27505 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
27507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27509 \begin_inset space ~
27517 arg "layout-paragraph"
27523 \begin_layout Standard
27524 \begin_inset Float figure
27531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27533 \begin_inset Graphics
27534 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
27543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27544 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27549 name "fig:A-star-in"
27566 \begin_layout Standard
27567 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
27568 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
27570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27579 ) and refer to it using the menu
27581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27587 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27591 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
27592 vague references like
27593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27600 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27601 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
27603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27611 For more about cross-references, see section
27612 \begin_inset space ~
27616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27618 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27625 \begin_layout Standard
27626 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
27627 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
27628 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
27629 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
27630 as described in section
27631 \begin_inset space ~
27635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27637 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27643 \begin_inset space ~
27647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27649 reference "fig:Two-images"
27653 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
27654 You can also set the images one below the other.
27656 \begin_inset space ~
27660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27662 reference "fig:Undefinable"
27667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27669 reference "fig:Star"
27673 are the subfigures.
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27677 \begin_inset Float figure
27684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27685 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27689 \begin_inset Float figure
27696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27697 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27702 name "fig:Undefinable"
27714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27715 \begin_inset Graphics
27716 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
27728 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27732 \begin_inset Float figure
27739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 \begin_inset Graphics
27759 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
27771 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27783 name "fig:Two-images"
27800 \begin_layout Subsection
27802 \begin_inset Index idx
27807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27809 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27826 \begin_layout Standard
27827 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
27829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27830 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
27833 or the toolbar button
27836 arg "float-insert table"
27840 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
27841 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
27842 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
27844 \begin_inset space ~
27848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27850 reference "tab:Table-float"
27857 \begin_layout Standard
27858 \begin_inset Float table
27865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27871 name "tab:Table-float"
27883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 \begin_inset Tabular
27886 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
27887 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27888 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27889 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27890 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28017 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
28025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28038 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
28041 \end{array}\right]$
28049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28062 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
28083 \begin_layout Subsection
28085 \begin_inset Index idx
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28092 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 \begin_layout Standard
28111 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
28112 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
28113 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
28115 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
28123 \begin_inset space ~
28131 \begin_layout Section
28133 \begin_inset Index idx
28138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28147 \begin_layout Standard
28149 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
28151 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
28152 \begin_inset space \space{}
28158 \begin_layout Standard
28159 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
28160 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
28162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28166 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
28167 and its alignment within the page.
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28172 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28182 height_special "totalheight"
28187 backgroundcolor "none"
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28193 This is a minipage.
28194 The text is set in an italic style.
28197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28200 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
28201 another formatting.
28209 \begin_layout Standard
28210 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
28213 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
28217 as described in section
28218 \begin_inset space ~
28222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28224 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
28229 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
28235 \begin_layout Standard
28236 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28246 height_special "totalheight"
28251 backgroundcolor "none"
28254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28255 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
28256 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
28262 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28266 \begin_inset Box Frameless
28276 height_special "totalheight"
28281 backgroundcolor "none"
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
28286 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28295 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
28304 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
28311 \begin_inset space ~
28319 \begin_layout Chapter
28320 Mathematical Formulas
28321 \begin_inset Index idx
28326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28333 \begin_inset Index idx
28338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28340 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
28343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28357 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
28370 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
28373 \begin_layout Section
28375 \begin_inset Index idx
28380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28382 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28399 \begin_layout Standard
28400 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
28413 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
28415 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
28416 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
28417 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
28419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28425 \begin_layout Standard
28426 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
28430 \begin_inset space ~
28435 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
28438 \begin_layout Standard
28439 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
28440 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28444 This is a line with an inline formula
28445 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
28451 \begin_layout Standard
28452 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
28453 paragraph, like this one:
28454 \begin_inset Formula
28461 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
28464 \begin_layout Standard
28466 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
28468 For example, typing
28469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28482 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
28483 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
28487 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
28490 \begin_inset space ~
28498 \begin_layout Subsection
28499 Navigating in Formulas
28500 \begin_inset Index idx
28505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28507 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28524 \begin_layout Standard
28525 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
28526 achieved with the arrow keys.
28528 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
28529 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
28534 will leave a formula construct (a square root
28535 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
28539 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
28543 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
28546 \end{array}\right]$
28554 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
28559 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
28560 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
28563 \begin_layout Standard
28568 , printed in this document as
28569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28573 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28580 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
28581 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
28582 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
28587 For example, if you want
28588 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
28596 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28606 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28610 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28615 , since in the latter case only the
28618 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
28623 will be under the square root sign:
28624 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
28630 \begin_layout Standard
28631 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
28633 \begin_inset Formula
28635 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28644 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
28645 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
28648 \begin_layout Subsection
28652 \begin_layout Standard
28653 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
28654 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
28658 and a cursor movement key to select text.
28659 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
28660 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
28661 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
28662 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
28666 \begin_layout Subsection
28667 Exponents and Subscripts
28668 \begin_inset Index idx
28673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 \begin_inset Index idx
28695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28697 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28714 \begin_layout Standard
28715 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
28718 arg "math-superscript"
28724 arg "math-subscript"
28727 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
28729 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
28732 , type in a formula
28735 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28745 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
28751 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
28755 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
28761 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28767 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
28769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28776 , you have to use an extra
28780 to separate the circumflex and the character.
28781 For example, if you want
28782 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
28788 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28794 Subscripts are similar: To get
28795 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
28801 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28809 \begin_layout Subsection
28811 \begin_inset Index idx
28816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28818 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28835 \begin_layout Standard
28836 Create a fraction either with the command
28842 or by using the icon
28845 arg "math-insert \\frac"
28851 \begin_inset space ~
28857 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
28858 The cursor is above the fraction line.
28859 To move it to the bottom, simply press
28864 To move back up, press
28869 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
28870 \begin_inset Formula
28872 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
28875 \end{array}\right)}\right]
28883 \begin_layout Subsection
28885 \begin_inset Index idx
28890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28892 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28909 \begin_layout Standard
28910 Roots can be created using the
28913 \begin_inset space ~
28921 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
28927 arg "math-insert \\root"
28949 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
28955 always produces a square root.
28958 \begin_layout Subsection
28959 Operators with Limits
28960 \begin_inset Index idx
28965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28967 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28982 \begin_inset Index idx
28987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28989 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29006 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
29013 \begin_layout Standard
29015 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
29019 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
29022 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
29023 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29024 by entering them as you would enter a super-
29025 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
29026 The sum operator will automatically place its
29027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29034 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
29036 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
29040 \begin_inset Formula
29042 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
29047 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29052 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
29054 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
29055 behind the operator and using the menu
29057 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29058 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29060 \begin_inset space ~
29064 \begin_inset space ~
29078 \begin_layout Standard
29079 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
29080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29088 \begin_inset Index idx
29093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29095 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29110 \begin_inset Formula
29112 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
29117 which will place the
29118 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
29122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29130 In inline formulas it looks like this:
29131 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
29145 Have a look at section
29146 \begin_inset space ~
29150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29152 reference "subsec:Functions"
29156 for an explanation of function macros.
29159 \begin_layout Subsection
29161 \begin_inset Index idx
29166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29168 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29185 \begin_layout Standard
29186 Most math symbols can be found in the
29189 \begin_inset space ~
29194 under one of several categories; including
29211 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
29215 \begin_layout Standard
29216 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29217 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
29218 don't have to use the
29221 \begin_inset space ~
29226 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
29228 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
29231 \begin_layout Subsection
29233 \begin_inset Index idx
29238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29240 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29258 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
29264 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
29270 \begin_inset space ~
29278 arg "math-insert \\space"
29282 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
29283 For example, the sequence
29288 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
29291 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29293 \begin_inset Graphics
29294 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
29299 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
29300 the space marker and enter space again several times.
29301 With every space enter the size will be changed.
29302 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
29303 , because they are negative
29305 Here are two examples:
29308 \begin_layout Standard
29318 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
29324 \begin_layout Standard
29334 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
29340 \begin_layout Subsection
29342 \begin_inset Index idx
29347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29349 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29366 name "subsec:Functions"
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29377 \begin_inset space ~
29382 contains under the button
29385 arg "math-insert \\functions"
29388 a number of function macros, such as
29389 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
29393 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
29401 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
29408 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
29409 avoid confusions, because
29410 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
29414 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
29420 \begin_layout Standard
29421 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
29423 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
29427 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
29433 \begin_layout Standard
29434 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
29435 are placed, as described in section
29436 \begin_inset space ~
29440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29442 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
29449 \begin_layout Subsection
29451 \begin_inset Index idx
29456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29458 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29475 \begin_layout Standard
29476 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
29478 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
29479 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29480 commands, for example, to enter
29481 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
29484 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
29485 Our example is entered by typing
29490 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29497 \begin_inset space ~
29501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29503 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
29507 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
29510 \begin_layout Standard
29511 \begin_inset Float table
29518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29519 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29524 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
29528 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
29536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29538 \begin_inset Tabular
29539 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
29540 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29541 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29542 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29543 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29627 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
29637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29681 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
29691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29735 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
29745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29789 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
29799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29843 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
29853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29897 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
29907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29951 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30005 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
30015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30059 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
30069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
30129 \begin_inset space ~
30137 arg "math-insert \\hat"
30140 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
30144 \begin_layout Section
30145 Brackets and Delimiters
30146 \begin_inset Index idx
30151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30153 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_inset Index idx
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30175 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30192 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
30199 \begin_layout Standard
30200 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
30202 For some purposes, using just the keys
30207 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
30208 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
30209 toolbar delimiter icon
30212 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
30216 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
30217 \begin_inset Formula
30219 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
30227 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
30228 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
30232 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
30235 and the expression on the right was entered using the
30241 \begin_inset Formula
30243 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
30251 \begin_layout Standard
30252 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
30253 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
30257 \begin_layout Standard
30258 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
30259 left side and right side.
30260 If you use the option
30263 \begin_inset space ~
30268 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
30269 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
30271 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
30276 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
30277 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
30280 \begin_layout Standard
30281 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
30282 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
30283 is to go inside the brackets.
30284 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
30289 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
30290 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
30291 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
30295 arg "math-delim ( )"
30301 \begin_layout Section
30302 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
30303 \begin_inset Index idx
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30310 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30325 \begin_inset Index idx
30330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30332 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30347 \begin_inset Index idx
30352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30354 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 Multi-line Equations
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30372 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30376 \begin_inset space ~
30384 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
30388 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
30389 Here is an example:
30390 \begin_inset Formula
30392 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
30401 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
30402 \begin_inset space ~
30406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30408 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
30413 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
30414 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
30415 This alignment is set in the box
30420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30469 for every column as default.
30470 For example, the sequence
30471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30482 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
30483 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
30484 corresponds to the relevant column.
30485 The result will look like this:
30486 \begin_inset Formula
30489 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
30490 column & has & has\,right\\
30491 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30501 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
30504 arg "newline-insert newline"
30507 while the cursor is in the matrix.
30508 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
30510 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30513 or the math toolbar.
30516 \begin_layout Standard
30517 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
30518 It can be created with the menu
30520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30521 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30523 \begin_inset space ~
30535 Here is an example:
30536 \begin_inset Formula
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30554 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
30557 arg "newline-insert newline"
30561 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
30566 arg "newline-insert newline"
30569 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
30570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30577 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
30578 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
30579 A new row is created by every further entry of
30582 arg "newline-insert newline"
30586 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
30587 Here is an example:
30588 \begin_inset Formula
30590 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
30591 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
30596 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
30597 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
30598 \begin_inset Formula
30600 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 The multi-line formula type described here is called
30616 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
30617 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
30618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30620 reference "eq:asquared"
30625 The other types are described in section
30626 \begin_inset space ~
30630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30632 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30639 \begin_layout Section
30640 Formula Numbering and Referencing
30641 \begin_inset Index idx
30646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 \begin_inset Index idx
30668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30670 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30674 Referencing formulas
30685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30687 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30694 \begin_layout Standard
30695 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
30697 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30698 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30700 \begin_inset space ~
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30712 arg "math-number-toggle"
30716 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30717 within parentheses.
30718 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
30719 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
30720 the document class.
30721 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
30722 separated by a dot:
30723 \begin_inset Formula
30733 arg "math-number-toggle"
30736 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
30737 You can only number displayed formulas.
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
30743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30744 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30746 \begin_inset space ~
30750 \begin_inset space ~
30758 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
30761 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
30762 \begin_inset Formula
30765 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
30771 To number all lines use the shortcut
30774 arg "math-number-toggle"
30780 \begin_layout Standard
30781 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30784 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
30785 A label is inserted with the menu
30787 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30796 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
30797 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
30798 It is recommended that you use the suggested
30799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30810 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
30811 label type when you have many labels in your document.
30812 We inserted in the following example the label
30813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30820 in the second line:
30821 \begin_inset Formula
30823 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
30824 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
30829 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
30830 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
30831 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
30833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30835 \begin_inset space ~
30843 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30847 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
30848 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30849 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
30850 as the formula number:
30853 \begin_layout Standard
30854 This is a cross-reference to equation (
30855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30857 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30864 \begin_layout Standard
30865 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
30866 's cross-reference box are described in section
30867 \begin_inset space ~
30871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30873 reference "sec:Cross-References"
30878 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
30886 \begin_layout Section
30887 User defined math macros
30888 \begin_inset Index idx
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30895 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 \begin_layout Standard
30914 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
30915 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
30916 Math macros are explained in section
30919 \begin_inset space ~
30931 \begin_layout Section
30935 \begin_layout Subsection
30937 \begin_inset Index idx
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30944 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30961 \begin_layout Standard
30962 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
30963 To set a font in a formula, use the
30966 \begin_inset space ~
30974 arg "math-insert \\font"
30977 , or enter its command, listed in table
30978 \begin_inset space ~
30982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30984 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30991 \begin_layout Standard
30992 \begin_inset Float table
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31005 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
31009 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31019 \begin_inset Tabular
31020 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
31021 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31023 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31055 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
31063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31082 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
31090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31109 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
31117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
31150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
31177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
31192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31197 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
31198 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
31206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31211 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
31223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31227 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
31235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31261 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
31269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
31284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31289 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
31297 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
31305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
31322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31326 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
31334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31360 \begin_layout Standard
31361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31369 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
31372 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
31374 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
31378 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
31397 \begin_layout Standard
31398 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
31399 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
31404 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a
31405 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
31407 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
31410 space when you need a space in the box.
31411 Here is an example where
31412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31423 denotes the set of numbers:
31424 \begin_inset Formula
31426 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31435 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
31436 You can, for example, put a character in
31445 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
31449 \begin_inset Newline newline
31452 So it is better not to use this feature.
31455 \begin_layout Standard
31456 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
31457 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
31461 \begin_inset Newline newline
31464 You can only print them emboldened using the command
31470 , which works like the other typeface commands:
31471 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
31477 \begin_layout Standard
31484 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
31487 \begin_layout Standard
31488 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
31490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31491 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31493 \begin_inset space ~
31501 \begin_layout Subsection
31503 \begin_inset Index idx
31508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31510 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31528 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
31530 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
31534 \begin_inset space ~
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31554 arg "math-insert \\font"
31558 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31559 in black instead of blue.
31560 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
31561 Here is an example:
31562 \begin_inset Formula
31565 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
31566 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
31575 \begin_layout Subsection
31577 \begin_inset Index idx
31582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31584 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31602 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
31603 automatically chosen in most situations.
31621 For most characters,
31629 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
31630 and certain other structures, are set larger in
31635 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
31636 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
31637 thinks are appropriate.
31638 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
31641 arg "math-insert \\style"
31645 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
31646 For example, you can set
31647 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
31650 , which is normally in
31659 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
31663 The four styles are used in the following example:
31666 \begin_layout Standard
31667 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
31671 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
31675 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
31679 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
31685 \begin_layout Standard
31686 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
31687 is set in a particular size with the menu
31689 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31696 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
31697 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
31698 will be adjusted to correspond.
31699 As an example here is a formula in the font size
31700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31710 \begin_layout Standard
31714 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
31720 \begin_layout Section
31721 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
31723 \begin_inset Index idx
31728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31735 \begin_inset Index idx
31740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31742 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31759 \begin_layout Standard
31761 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
31762 that are in common use.
31765 \begin_layout Subsection
31766 Enabling AMS-Support
31769 \begin_layout Standard
31770 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
31772 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
31788 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
31789 selecting the checkbox
31792 \begin_inset space ~
31796 \begin_inset space ~
31800 \begin_inset space ~
31809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31813 \begin_inset Index idx
31818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31820 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31837 \begin_inset space ~
31843 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
31844 -errors in formulas,
31845 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
31848 \begin_layout Subsection
31850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31852 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31857 \begin_inset Index idx
31862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31868 Multi-line Equations
31881 \begin_layout Standard
31882 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
31883 provides a selection of different formula types.
31885 allows you to choose between
31906 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
31907 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31914 , for an explanation of these formula types.
31917 \begin_layout Chapter
31921 \begin_layout Section
31923 \begin_inset Index idx
31928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31937 name "sec:Cross-References"
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31945 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31946 's strengths is cross-references.
31947 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
31949 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
31950 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31951 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31954 \begin_layout Enumerate
31958 \begin_layout Enumerate
31959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31961 name "enu:Second-item"
31968 \begin_layout Enumerate
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31973 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31978 or by pressing the toolbar button
31985 A gray label box like this:
31986 \begin_inset Graphics
31987 filename clipart/label.png
31991 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31993 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
31995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32028 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
32029 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
32031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32046 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
32048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32051 or the toolbar button
32054 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32058 A gray cross-reference box like this:
32059 \begin_inset Graphics
32060 filename clipart/reference.png
32064 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
32066 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
32067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32079 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
32083 \begin_layout Standard
32084 As an alternative to
32086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32089 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
32094 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
32095 to the actual cursor position via the menu
32097 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32110 Here is our cross-reference: Item
32111 \begin_inset space ~
32115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32117 reference "enu:Second-item"
32124 \begin_layout Standard
32125 It is recommended to use a
32126 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
32128 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
32135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32136 described in section
32137 \begin_inset space ~
32141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32143 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
32152 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
32153 line breaks between them.
32156 \begin_layout Standard
32157 There are eight formats of cross-references:
32160 \begin_layout Description
32161 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
32162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32164 reference "fig:Two-images"
32171 \begin_layout Description
32172 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
32173 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
32175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32185 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32192 \begin_layout Description
32193 <page>: prints the page number: Page
32194 \begin_inset space ~
32198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32199 LatexCommand pageref
32200 reference "fig:Two-images"
32207 \begin_layout Description
32209 \begin_inset space ~
32213 \begin_inset space ~
32216 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
32217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32218 LatexCommand vpageref
32219 reference "fig:Two-images"
32224 \begin_inset Newline newline
32227 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
32228 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
32229 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
32230 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
32231 it prints “on the next page”.
32232 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
32235 \begin_layout Description
32237 \begin_inset space ~
32241 \begin_inset space ~
32245 \begin_inset space ~
32248 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
32249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32251 reference "fig:Two-images"
32256 \begin_inset Newline newline
32259 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
32265 ; otherwise it behaves like
32269 \begin_inset space ~
32273 \begin_inset space ~
32282 \begin_layout Description
32284 \begin_inset space ~
32287 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
32288 \begin_inset Newline newline
32292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32300 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32310 \begin_inset Index idx
32315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32318 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32333 \begin_inset Index idx
32338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32361 \begin_inset Newline newline
32364 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
32365 -package should be used for this feature by setting
32368 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
32372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32381 is the default and preferred because
32385 supports only English documents.
32386 The format is specified by using the command
32390 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
32399 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32400 preamble of the document.
32401 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
32403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32419 \begin_inset Newline newline
32426 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
32431 \begin_inset Newline newline
32442 predefines reference formats for all available types.
32443 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
32445 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
32446 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
32451 , you might do so as follows:
32452 \begin_inset Newline newline
32459 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
32460 format{prop}{Proposition
32465 \begin_inset Newline newline
32468 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
32469 the package documentation
32470 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32472 key "prettyref,refstyle"
32478 \begin_inset Newline newline
32489 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
32496 \begin_layout Description
32498 \begin_inset space ~
32501 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
32502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32503 LatexCommand nameref
32504 reference "fig:Two-images"
32511 \begin_layout Description
32513 \begin_inset space ~
32516 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32517 label for the reference:
32518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32519 LatexCommand labelonly
32520 reference "fig:Two-images"
32525 \begin_inset Newline newline
32528 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
32529 Code, if you want to issue a command
32530 that \SpecialChar LyX
32536 , then you may want to use the
32539 \begin_inset space ~
32544 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
32546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32554 This is the form needed for e.
32555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32559 \begin_inset space \space{}
32566 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
32567 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32569 The varieties are adjusted in the field
32573 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
32577 \begin_layout Standard
32578 You can only use the style
32582 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
32586 is always possible.
32589 \begin_layout Standard
32590 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
32591 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
32593 Referencing formulas is explained in section
32594 \begin_inset space ~
32598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32600 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
32607 \begin_layout Standard
32608 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
32612 \begin_inset space ~
32616 \begin_inset space ~
32621 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
32622 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
32623 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
32626 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
32629 \begin_inset space ~
32634 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
32635 You can also go back with the toolbar button
32638 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
32642 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
32643 or, using the menu:
32645 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
32646 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
32654 \begin_layout Standard
32655 You can change labels at any time.
32656 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
32658 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
32660 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
32661 change them all manually
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32667 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
32669 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32674 References are described in detail in the section
32685 \begin_layout Section
32686 Table of Contents and other Listings
32687 \begin_inset Index idx
32692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32699 \begin_inset Index idx
32704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 \begin_inset Index idx
32726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32742 \begin_layout Subsection
32744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32746 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
32756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32757 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32759 \begin_inset space ~
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32769 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
32771 If you click on it, the
32775 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
32776 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
32777 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
32779 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32781 \begin_inset space ~
32786 that is described in section
32787 \begin_inset space ~
32791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32793 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32801 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
32802 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
32804 \begin_inset space ~
32808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32810 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
32814 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32822 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
32826 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
32828 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
32831 \begin_layout Subsection
32832 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
32833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32835 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32843 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
32845 You can insert them via the
32847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32848 List/Contents/References
32851 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
32854 \begin_layout Section
32855 URLs and Hyperlinks
32856 \begin_inset Index idx
32861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32868 \begin_inset Index idx
32873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32882 \begin_layout Subsection
32884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32893 \begin_layout Standard
32894 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32902 \begin_layout Standard
32903 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
32905 \begin_inset Flex URL
32908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32910 https://www.lyx.org
32918 \begin_layout Standard
32919 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
32925 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
32929 \begin_layout Standard
32930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32938 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32947 \begin_layout Subsection
32949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32951 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32958 \begin_layout Standard
32959 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32964 or with the toolbar button
32971 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32980 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32981 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32982 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32984 name "LyX's homepage"
32985 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32990 , an Email address like this:
32991 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32993 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32994 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
33000 , or a link to a file.
33005 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33013 \begin_layout Standard
33014 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
33016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33027 to the link target.
33030 \begin_layout Standard
33031 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
33032 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
33033 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
33034 the text style dialog.
33035 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
33039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33041 name "LyX's homepage"
33042 target "https://www.lyx.org"
33050 \begin_layout Standard
33051 The link text color can be changed, when the option
33055 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
33057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33058 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33062 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
33064 \begin_inset Newline newline
33072 \begin_inset Newline newline
33079 in the PDF Properties dialog.
33080 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
33084 \begin_layout Section
33086 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
33088 \begin_inset Index idx
33093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33102 name "sec:Counters"
33109 \begin_layout Standard
33111 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33112 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33113 is its ability to manage counters.
33114 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
33115 modify counters directly.
33116 This can be done in
33117 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
33119 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
33122 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33123 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
33124 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33130 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
33131 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
33132 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
33133 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
33134 to set the section counter to four.
33141 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
33142 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
33143 These effects can also be limited to
33144 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
33146 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
33149 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33151 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
33152 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
33154 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
33157 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
33161 \begin_layout Standard
33163 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
33164 There are five commands you can use:
33167 \begin_layout Enumerate
33169 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
33174 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
33177 \begin_layout Enumerate
33179 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
33184 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
33185 you choose a negative number)
33188 \begin_layout Enumerate
33190 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
33195 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
33198 \begin_layout Enumerate
33200 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
33203 Save value of counter:
33205 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
33208 \begin_layout Enumerate
33210 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
33213 Restore value of counter:
33215 Restores the previously saved value.
33218 \begin_layout Standard
33220 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
33221 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
33222 those that are available in the current document class.
33227 \begin_layout Section
33229 \begin_inset Index idx
33234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33243 name "sec:Appendices"
33250 \begin_layout Standard
33251 Appendices are created with the menu
33253 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33255 \begin_inset space ~
33259 \begin_inset space ~
33265 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
33266 as the appendix part of the book.
33267 This part is marked with a red borderline.
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33271 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
33272 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
33273 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
33274 and the subsection number.
33275 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33281 \begin_inset space ~
33285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33287 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
33295 \begin_inset space ~
33299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33301 reference "subsec:Export"
33308 \begin_layout Section
33310 \begin_inset Index idx
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33324 name "sec:Bibliography"
33331 \begin_layout Standard
33332 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
33334 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
33335 \begin_inset space ~
33339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33341 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33348 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
33353 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
33354 \begin_inset space ~
33358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33360 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
33365 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
33366 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
33367 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
33371 using a bibliography database.
33374 \begin_layout Standard
33375 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
33376 use two bibliographies in this document, a
33380 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
33381 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
33382 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
33383 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
33384 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
33387 \begin_layout Subsection
33388 The Bibliography Environment
33389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33391 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33398 \begin_layout Standard
33403 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
33405 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
33414 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
33416 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
33417 of ASCII characters only.
33421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33426 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
33432 \begin_inset Newline newline
33436 \begin_inset Flex URL
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
33451 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33461 , a short form of its title, as the key.
33462 \begin_inset Newline newline
33469 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
33470 the number of the entry.
33475 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
33484 \begin_layout Standard
33485 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
33487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33490 or the toolbar button
33493 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
33497 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
33498 containing the available citations.
33499 Select one or more keys from the list and
33509 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
33510 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
33514 \begin_layout Standard
33515 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
33516 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
33517 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
33519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33533 Companion Second Edition
33536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33538 key "latexcompanion"
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33547 The \SpecialChar LyX
33548 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
33549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33560 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33567 \begin_inset Index idx
33572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33575 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33591 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
33592 the label needs to be given the form
33593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33604 Author A and Author B(Year)
33605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33612 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33624 in the document settings
33625 \begin_inset Index idx
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
33650 \begin_inset space ~
33656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33658 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
33666 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
33668 Once you have done that, the
33671 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
33673 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
33676 dialog has three input fields instead of the
33693 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
33694 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
33695 These two are madatory.
33696 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
33699 Baker, Jones, and Williams
33701 ) and in abrreviated form (
33708 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
33709 add the abbreviated form to
33713 and the full list to the optional
33721 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
33722 If specified like this,
33724 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
33725 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
33728 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33735 is specified, toggling
33736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33743 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
33744 full and abbreviated list
33748 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
33749 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
33750 the citation references.
33751 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
33756 \begin_layout Standard
33757 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
33760 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33770 arg "layout-paragraph"
33774 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
33777 \begin_layout Subsection
33778 Bibliography databases
33779 \begin_inset Index idx
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33803 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33810 \begin_layout Standard
33811 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
33816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33817 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
33819 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
33820 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33825 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
33827 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
33828 your working field in a database.
33829 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
33830 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
33831 list for that document.
33832 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
33836 \begin_layout Standard
33837 The database is a text file with the file extension
33838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33849 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
33850 The format is explained in
33851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33858 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33860 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33862 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33868 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
33869 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33870 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33872 \begin_inset Flex URL
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33887 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33888 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33889 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
33891 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
33893 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
33894 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33895 Those are addressed by
33900 \begin_inset Index idx
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33924 (although it has been significantly
33925 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33935 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33936 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33937 might conversely fail to correctly
33938 handle databases that use specific
33947 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
33951 \begin_layout Standard
33952 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33957 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
33959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33963 \begin_inset Index idx
33968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33970 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33991 \begin_inset space ~
33996 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34005 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34007 \begin_inset Index idx
34012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34018 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34032 \begin_layout Standard
34033 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34037 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34039 \begin_inset space ~
34045 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
34046 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34054 Add bibliography to TOC
34056 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
34061 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
34062 in the document or just the cited references.
34064 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
34069 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
34070 differ from the encoding of the document.
34075 \begin_layout Standard
34076 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34077 style file is a text file with the file extension
34078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34089 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
34090 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34091 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
34092 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
34094 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
34099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34100 For information on how this is done, have a look at
34101 \begin_inset Newline newline
34105 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34107 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
34117 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34122 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
34130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34132 \begin_inset Index idx
34137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34154 \begin_inset Index idx
34159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34162 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34179 \begin_layout Standard
34180 Accessing a database via
34184 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34186 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
34188 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
34193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34194 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34202 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34203 you cannot select a
34208 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
34212 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34215 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
34216 As for the styles, note the following.
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34226 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
34228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34239 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
34240 file (text file with the file extension
34241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34252 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
34253 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
34255 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
34259 \begin_layout Standard
34264 styles are not set in the
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34272 dialog, but in the document settings.
34273 \begin_inset Index idx
34278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34280 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34294 However, in the dialog in the
34298 field, which is only visible if you use
34302 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
34303 example how its heading will appear).
34304 These options are described in detail in the
34309 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
34321 \begin_inset space ~
34325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34327 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34338 Bibliography Processors
34341 \begin_layout Standard
34342 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
34343 uses a bibliography processor,
34344 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
34345 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
34346 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34348 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
34349 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
34355 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
34356 You can do this on a general level in
34358 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34359 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34360 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
34363 or for individual documents in
34365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34366 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34370 The following variants are available by default:
34373 \begin_layout Description
34374 biber a specific, modern processor
34375 \begin_inset Index idx
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34383 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34397 developed exclusively for
34401 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34407 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
34412 makes use of; if you use the
34416 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
34423 \begin_layout Description
34424 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
34425 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
34426 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
34430 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
34433 \begin_layout Description
34434 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
34435 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
34439 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
34443 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
34447 features are supported.
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 By default (with the
34457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34458 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34472 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34473 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
34476 ), \SpecialChar LyX
34477 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
34490 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34491 -based bibliography styles).
34492 This should suit most needs.
34495 \begin_layout Standard
34496 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
34497 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
34498 (in \SpecialChar LyX
34503 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34504 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
34505 You can adjust it in
34507 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34508 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34509 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
34515 \begin_layout Standard
34516 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
34517 can add below the selection.
34518 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
34519 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34539 \begin_layout Standard
34541 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
34543 These are explained in detail in section
34545 Customizing Bibliographies
34549 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34554 Additional Features
34557 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
34561 \begin_layout Subsection
34563 \begin_inset Index idx
34568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34570 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34587 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 Many different citation formats are common, e.
34596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34600 \begin_inset space \space{}
34603 numerical citation (as
34604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34611 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
34612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34619 ) or author-year citations (as
34620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34629 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34634 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
34637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34638 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34642 \begin_inset Index idx
34647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34649 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34663 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
34669 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
34670 labels, is there to use
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34689 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
34690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34692 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34699 \begin_layout Standard
34700 With a bibliography database (see
34701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34703 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34710 ) one has in contrary to the
34714 environment full access to the formatting styles.
34715 These style formats are available:
34718 \begin_layout Description
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34723 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34724 -based approached without any additional packages
34725 (simple numeric citations).
34728 \begin_layout Description
34729 Biblatex loads the package
34734 \begin_inset Index idx
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34742 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34756 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
34758 Biblatex citation style
34762 Biblatex bibliography style
34765 Options to the package
34769 can be entered in the
34776 \begin_layout Description
34778 \begin_inset space ~
34782 \begin_inset space ~
34785 mode) loads the package
34789 with the natbib compatibility mode.
34790 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
34802 behavior very closely.
34807 this option has some additional styles.
34812 styles are also supported by this variant.
34815 \begin_layout Description
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34820 (BibTeX) loads the package
34825 \begin_inset Index idx
34830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34847 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34850 \begin_layout Description
34852 \begin_inset space ~
34855 (BibTeX) loads the package
34860 \begin_inset Index idx
34865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34868 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34882 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34885 \begin_layout Standard
34894 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
34896 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34905 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34907 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
34908 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34910 Biblatex citation style
34913 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
34919 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
34923 \begin_layout Standard
34924 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
34925 are available in the
34930 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
34931 a name prefix such as
34932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34947 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34952 \begin_inset space \space{}
34956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34967 \begin_layout Standard
34968 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
34970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34974 \begin_inset space \space{}
34977 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
34979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34983 \begin_inset space \space{}
34987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34999 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35017 Here is a simple example where the text
35018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35029 appears after the reference:
35032 \begin_layout Quote
35034 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35037 key "latexcompanion"
35045 \begin_layout Standard
35046 All styles except for
35050 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
35052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35060 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
35064 \begin_layout Standard
35065 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
35066 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
35067 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
35072 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
35073 multi-citation (so-called
35074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35077 qualified citation lists
35078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35084 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
35089 dialog will display three columns in the field
35096 \begin_inset space ~
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35112 \begin_inset space ~
35118 If you double-click on an item's
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35129 \begin_inset space ~
35134 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
35137 General text before
35143 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
35146 \begin_layout Subsection
35148 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
35149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35151 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
35155 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
35159 \begin_layout Standard
35161 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
35163 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
35166 \begin_inset space ~
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35174 \begin_inset space ~
35178 \begin_inset space ~
35181 Content\SpecialChar ldots
35184 context menu if specific conditions are met:
35187 \begin_layout Itemize
35189 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
35190 If citation entries include any of the fields
35191 \begin_inset Flex Code
35194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35196 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35205 \begin_inset Flex Code
35208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35210 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35218 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
35219 \begin_inset Flex Code
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35224 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35232 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
35233 \begin_inset Flex Code
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35238 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35246 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
35249 \begin_layout Itemize
35251 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
35252 If citation entries include any of the fields
35253 \begin_inset Flex Code
35256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35258 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35266 (filled by JabRef) or
35267 \begin_inset Flex Code
35270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35272 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
35280 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
35281 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
35282 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
35285 \begin_layout Standard
35287 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
35288 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
35289 also searches your disk for matching files if you
35292 Search drive for cited files
35296 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35297 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
35298 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35299 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35303 It uses the tokens supplied at
35307 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
35308 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
35309 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
35311 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
35313 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
35314 of the file (at arbitrary position).
35316 opens the first matching file it finds.
35317 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
35318 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
35319 the chance this works for you.
35324 \begin_layout Standard
35326 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
35327 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
35328 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35330 \begin_inset Flex Code
35333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35335 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
35344 \begin_inset Flex Code
35347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35349 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
35357 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
35359 Customization manual
35364 Cite format description
35371 \begin_layout Section
35373 \begin_inset Index idx
35378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35394 \begin_layout Standard
35395 An index entry is created if you use the menu
35397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35404 or the toolbar button
35412 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110584
35416 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
35418 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110812
35422 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110886
35426 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
35428 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110904
35430 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
35433 the text that appears in the index
35434 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112993
35435 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
35437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35444 index inset in the heading above for example)
35447 The word where the cursor is in
35448 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112984
35451 or the currently highlighted text
35452 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112984
35455 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
35457 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
35461 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112984
35463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35466 e., copied into the inset)
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35473 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
35474 (which prints out the index in your document)
35477 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
35478 in the document with
35479 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
35484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35485 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35493 A light blue box labeled
35494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35505 will show the place where the index
35506 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
35508 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
35512 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
35517 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
35519 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
35521 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
35524 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
35526 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
35528 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
35529 insets, as there are no settings to make.
35530 This changes if you select
35531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35534 Use multiple indexes
35535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35539 \begin_inset space ~
35543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35545 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
35553 In this case, the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings
35555 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35563 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
35564 By default, an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically
35565 ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index
35566 entry has been inserted in the document.
35567 However, you can customize index entries to look different.
35568 You can group index entries hierarchically, let the index list refer to
35569 a range of pages rather than a single page, let it refer to another entry
35570 in the index list rather than, or additionally to, a page, you can format
35571 the page reference (e.
35572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35575 g., make it bold for specific pages), and you can determine the order of
35576 an entry in the list.
35577 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
35579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35591 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings
35592 dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
35597 \begin_layout Standard
35599 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
35600 give a short overview of
35601 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
35605 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
35606 these features in turn
35607 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
35610 in the next subsections.
35611 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35612 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
35613 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35615 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35617 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
35625 \begin_layout Subsection
35627 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
35628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35630 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35636 Grouping Index Entries
35637 \begin_inset Index idx
35642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35661 \begin_layout Standard
35662 Index entries are often
35663 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
35666 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
35667 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
35668 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
35673 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35680 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35690 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
35691 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
35694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35695 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35698 or, more easily, by pressing the
35703 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
35704 Maximally two such subentry insets, i.
35705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35708 e., three levels of grouping in total, are allowed per index entry.
35709 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in
35710 the index inset, but the order of them matters and determines the grouping
35712 In the \SpecialChar LyX
35713 file, the index entry in the header above shows an example for
35714 a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this
35715 document at the entry
35720 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35729 \begin_layout Standard
35731 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
35732 In the output, each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
35733 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they
35734 have also a separate entry (without subentry)
35735 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35736 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
35737 lists under the entry
35738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35746 First we create the entry
35747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35755 \begin_inset space ~
35759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35761 reference "subsec:Lists"
35766 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35773 reference "sec:Itemize"
35777 , we insert the command
35780 \begin_layout Standard
35782 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35788 \begin_layout Standard
35790 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35796 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35804 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
35805 for the enumerated list in section
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35812 reference "sec:Enumerate"
35821 \begin_layout Standard
35823 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
35824 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35825 , subentries are indicated by a preceding
35826 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
35830 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
35834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35842 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
35844 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35845 , although you have to take care that the character
35849 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
35851 For this reason, a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index
35852 entry in a specific way.
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35860 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35865 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
35866 marks the grouping levels.
35870 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
35871 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
35872 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
35873 If we don't have an index entry for
35874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35881 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
35886 \begin_layout Subsection
35888 \begin_inset Index idx
35893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35895 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35912 \begin_layout Standard
35914 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
35916 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
35920 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
35921 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
35922 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
35923 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
35927 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
35929 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
35933 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
35934 index more pages under the same entry
35935 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
35936 refer to a page range instead, you can do this by inserting two index entries:
35937 one that marks the beginning of the range, the other that marks its end
35941 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
35942 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
35943 To mark start and end, select the respective
35947 option in the index inset settings dialog.
35948 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
35949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35967 \begin_layout Standard
35969 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
35970 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
35971 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found, the
35972 index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing
35973 you about the reason.
35976 \begin_layout Standard
35978 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
35979 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an
35980 index entry in section
35981 \begin_inset space ~
35985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35987 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35996 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
35999 Paragraph environments|(
36002 \begin_layout Standard
36004 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36005 and another entry at the end of section
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36012 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
36019 \begin_layout Standard
36021 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36024 Paragraph environments|)
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36029 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
36031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36054 respectively start and end the index range.
36055 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
36056 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
36057 the pages of the indexed document parts.
36058 An example is the index entry
36059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36062 Document ! Settings
36063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36071 \begin_layout Subsection
36073 \begin_inset Index idx
36078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36080 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36097 \begin_layout Standard
36098 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
36099 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
36100 rather than, or in addition to, a page
36104 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
36105 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for
36106 an entry at different places, e.
36107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36118 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
36119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36130 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
36131 \begin_inset space ~
36135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36137 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
36142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36156 \begin_layout Standard
36158 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
36159 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
36162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36163 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36169 \begin_layout Standard
36171 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
36172 If you want a cross-reference and page references, you can use
36174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36175 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36187 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred
36188 to by page number as in
36189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36205 \begin_layout Standard
36207 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
36208 We referred for example in the index entry
36209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36223 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
36227 ) to the index entry
36228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36235 in the same section using the entry
36238 \begin_layout Standard
36240 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
36243 GIF|see{Image formats}
36246 \begin_layout Standard
36248 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
36249 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36251 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
36252 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
36257 \begin_layout Subsection
36259 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
36260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36262 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
36269 \begin_inset Index idx
36274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36276 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36295 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
36296 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
36297 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
36302 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
36305 f you use accented characters in the index entry
36306 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
36307 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
36308 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
36309 or if you use macros
36312 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
36316 \begin_layout Standard
36318 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
36319 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
36324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36325 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
36327 \begin_inset space ~
36331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36333 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
36342 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
36343 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
36344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36368 \begin_inset Index idx
36373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36375 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36390 \begin_inset Index idx
36395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36397 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36412 \begin_inset Index idx
36417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36418 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
36423 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
36424 maïs, maison, maître.
36425 To achieve this, we use the command
36428 \begin_layout Standard
36430 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36433 previous entry@current entry
36436 \begin_layout Standard
36438 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36439 In our case we want to have
36440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36455 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
36458 \begin_layout Standard
36460 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36466 \begin_layout Standard
36468 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
36469 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
36470 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
36472 See the next subsection for an example.
36473 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
36477 \begin_layout Standard
36479 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
36480 To accommodate for that, you can use
36482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36483 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
36487 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index, it is just used
36488 for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
36489 For instance, you can pass the sort key
36490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36501 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosoph
36505 \begin_layout Standard
36507 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
36508 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
36509 , sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
36511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36519 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
36520 , although you have to take care that the character
36522 For this reason, a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36531 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
36540 \begin_layout Subsection
36542 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
36544 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
36548 \begin_inset Index idx
36553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36555 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36574 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
36576 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
36579 he appearance of index entries
36580 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
36581 can be formatted as usual
36583 via the text style dialog
36584 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
36585 , the toolbar or shortcuts.
36586 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in
36590 \begin_inset Index idx
36595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36597 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36603 This is an italic dummy entry
36614 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
36615 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical
36617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36629 , will be listed separately.
36631 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
36633 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
36637 \begin_layout Standard
36639 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
36643 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
36645 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
36649 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
36654 option in the index entry settings dialog.
36656 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
36657 number using the character
36658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36665 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36666 -command without a backslash.
36667 We can write for example
36668 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
36669 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
36686 With the latter, you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
36691 leading backslash, e.
36692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36696 a self-defined command
36697 \begin_inset Flex Code
36700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36702 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
36710 or an existing macro such as
36711 \begin_inset Flex Code
36714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36716 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
36729 \begin_layout Standard
36731 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
36734 italic page number:|textit
36737 \begin_layout Standard
36739 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
36740 to get the page number in italic.
36741 \begin_inset Index idx
36746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36747 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
36752 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
36753 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
36755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36771 \begin_inset space ~
36777 Have a look at section
36778 \begin_inset space ~
36782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36784 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36788 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36794 \begin_layout Standard
36796 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
36797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36805 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
36809 to generate the index, see section
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36816 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
36825 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
36830 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
36831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36834 key "latexcompanion"
36849 \begin_layout Standard
36850 In general, we encourage you to
36851 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
36852 not format page numbers directly as shown above
36853 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
36854 use self-defined commands
36858 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
36859 This makes it easier to change the formatting, should you or your publisher
36860 decide to do that later.
36862 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
36863 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
36864 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
36865 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
36867 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
36871 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
36872 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed
36874 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
36875 definition of the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
36877 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
36881 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
36884 the following in the preamble
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36893 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
36895 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
36901 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36911 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
36913 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
36914 add the custom formatting
36915 \begin_inset Flex Code
36918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36920 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
36928 to the respective entry settings dialog.
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36935 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
36941 \begin_layout Standard
36943 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
36944 in the index entry.
36945 \begin_inset Index idx
36950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36951 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
36956 The advantage is that, i
36957 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
36958 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed
36962 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions
36963 must not be italic but bold, you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
36964 not every single index entry.
36965 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
36969 \begin_layout Standard
36971 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
36972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36977 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
36982 If you use the index processor
36988 makeindex or xindex
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36997 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
37001 ), such custom macros do not work out of the box.
37006 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
37007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37014 (style file) you use before they can be used.
37015 In the given case, this would require to add the following line in the
37019 \begin_layout Verbatim
37021 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
37023 (markup-locref :open "
37025 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
37028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37030 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
37032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37035 key "latexcompanion"
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 You can also change the layout
37052 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
37054 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
37059 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
37061 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
37065 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
37069 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
37073 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
37075 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
37078 get a bold font for all index entries.
37080 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
37081 In general, however, it is better (and required for
37082 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
37085 more advanced tasks
37086 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
37090 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
37093 to set up a so-called
37096 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
37119 ) to determine the formatting;
37120 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
37124 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
37126 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
37132 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
37138 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
37146 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
37154 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
37158 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37162 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
37168 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
37170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37172 key "makeindex,xindy"
37181 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
37182 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37183 packages available that ease such formatting, see
37185 \begin_inset Flex URL
37188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37190 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
37192 https://ctan.org/topic/index
37202 \begin_layout Subsection
37204 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
37205 Special Characters in Index Entries
37206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37208 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37215 \begin_layout Standard
37217 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
37218 As already mentioned above, some characters have a special meaning in index
37220 \begin_inset Flex Code
37223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37225 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
37234 \begin_inset Flex Code
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37239 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
37248 \begin_inset Flex Code
37251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37253 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
37254 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37265 \begin_inset Flex Code
37268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37270 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
37279 If you use them literally, you might get surprising results or even a non-worki
37281 In any case, you will not get the character itself.
37284 \begin_layout Standard
37286 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
37287 In order to use these characters in inset entries, they have to be
37288 \begin_inset Quotes els
37292 \begin_inset Quotes ers
37295 , that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat
37296 this character without its special meaning.
37297 By default, the escape character is
37298 \begin_inset Flex Code
37301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37303 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
37304 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37314 (but this can be changed).
37316 \begin_inset Flex Code
37319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37321 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
37322 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37333 \begin_inset Flex Code
37336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37338 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
37339 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37350 \begin_inset Flex Code
37353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37355 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
37356 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37360 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
37371 \begin_inset Flex Code
37374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37376 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
37377 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37387 to get the special character you want.
37388 Note that the escape character,
37389 \begin_inset Flex Code
37392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37394 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
37395 \begin_inset Quotes qld
37409 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37416 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37425 \begin_layout Subsection
37427 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
37429 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
37433 \begin_inset Index idx
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37440 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37457 name "subsec:Index-Program"
37464 \begin_layout Standard
37466 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
37468 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
37474 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
37479 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
37481 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
37486 variant of it, for that matter)
37488 for index generation; otherwise the program
37492 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37493 distribution, is used.
37494 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
37499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37501 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
37506 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
37507 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
37508 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
37509 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
37510 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
37525 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
37526 As a further option, you can select the rather new
37533 \begin_layout Itemize
37535 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
37540 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
37541 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
37542 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly
37543 (we have shown above, section
37544 \begin_inset space ~
37548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37550 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
37554 , how to manually fix this sorting, but this is very tedious work).
37557 \begin_layout Itemize
37559 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
37560 The alternative program,
37564 , is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
37565 It can sort most languages correctly, and it is also much more customizable
37571 is no longer actively maintained, and it has bugs that are most likely
37572 not being addressed anytime soon.
37577 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install
37578 on some systems (particularly Windows).
37579 But if you have it available, it is almost always a better option than
37587 \begin_layout Itemize
37589 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
37594 , is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
37595 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
37596 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
37597 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
37599 much customizable and supports many languages.
37600 The program is still in development, so not everything might work equally
37601 well than in the older processors.
37602 But the program is definitely worth a try, particularly if
37606 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37613 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
37615 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
37619 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
37621 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
37624 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
37625 's preferences dialog,
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37633 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
37638 The available options are listed and explained in
37639 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
37641 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37643 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
37649 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
37651 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37653 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
37661 In this dialog, you can
37662 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
37664 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
37668 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
37670 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
37673 alternative program
37674 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
37677 to generate the index.
37680 \begin_layout Standard
37681 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
37682 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
37685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37686 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37690 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
37691 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
37694 \begin_layout Subsection
37696 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
37697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37699 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37708 \begin_layout Standard
37709 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
37710 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
37711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37718 next to the standard index.
37720 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
37721 that add this feature.
37728 \begin_inset Index idx
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37736 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37750 package to generate multiple indexes.
37751 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
37756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37757 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
37759 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37767 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
37768 style, but it also includes
37769 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
37770 Please consult the package's manual for details.
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37779 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
37780 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
37782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37783 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 and select the option
37788 Use multiple Indexes
37795 already contains the standard index
37796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37804 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
37805 also appear as a heading) to the
37809 input field and press the
37814 The new index now also appears in the list.
37815 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
37816 label color to the new index.
37819 \begin_layout Standard
37820 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
37823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37824 List/Contents/References
37830 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
37831 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
37832 are additional features:
37835 \begin_layout Itemize
37836 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
37837 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
37840 \begin_layout Itemize
37841 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
37842 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
37847 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
37848 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
37849 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
37850 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
37853 \begin_layout Itemize
37858 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
37859 code in the name of the index.
37862 \begin_layout Section
37863 Nomenclature/Glossary
37864 \begin_inset Index idx
37869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 \begin_inset Index idx
37881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37883 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
37886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37900 name "sec:Nomenclature"
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
37909 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
37910 called nomenclature or glossary.
37913 \begin_layout Standard
37914 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37921 \begin_inset Index idx
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37929 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37946 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37953 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37957 \begin_layout Standard
37958 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
37959 and then use the menu
37961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37967 \begin_inset space ~
37972 or the toolbar button
37975 arg "nomencl-insert"
37980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37991 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
37994 \begin_layout Standard
37995 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
37996 The first is the term or
38000 that you wish to define.
38005 of the term or symbol.
38008 \begin_layout Standard
38009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38017 To use \SpecialChar TeX
38018 code for nomenclature entries the option
38022 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
38030 \begin_layout Subsection
38031 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
38032 \begin_inset Index idx
38037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38056 \begin_layout Standard
38057 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
38061 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
38064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38068 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38076 \begin_inset Newline newline
38084 \begin_inset Newline newline
38090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38097 character starts/ends the formula.
38098 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
38099 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
38101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38111 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38122 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38123 syntax is given in section
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38130 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38146 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
38148 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
38149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38153 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38160 in this document is:
38161 \begin_inset Newline newline
38166 dummy entry for the character
38171 \begin_inset Newline newline
38183 \begin_inset space ~
38193 font use the command
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38223 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
38224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38228 \begin_inset space \space{}
38232 \begin_inset Newline newline
38248 \begin_inset Newline newline
38251 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
38252 This command will make the font of all symbols
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38268 If the characters |
38269 \begin_inset space \space{}
38273 \begin_inset space \space{}
38277 \begin_inset space \space{}
38281 \begin_inset space \space{}
38285 \begin_inset space \space{}
38288 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
38289 code they need to be escaped
38291 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
38293 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
38296 character in front of them.
38297 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
38299 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38300 LatexCommand nomenclature
38301 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
38302 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
38308 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
38310 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38311 LatexCommand nomenclature
38312 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
38313 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
38323 \begin_layout Subsection
38324 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
38325 \begin_inset Index idx
38330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38349 \begin_layout Standard
38350 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38351 -code of the symbol
38353 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
38355 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
38358 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38359 LatexCommand nomenclature
38361 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
38369 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38373 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
38374 LatexCommand nomenclature
38377 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
38383 They will be sorted by
38384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38410 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38413 will be sorted before the
38417 since the character
38418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38425 is considered in sorting.
38428 \begin_layout Standard
38429 To control the sort order, you can edit the
38432 \begin_inset space ~
38437 field of the nomenclature dialog.
38438 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
38440 For the example given, you can insert
38444 in this field for the
38445 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38452 will be located before
38453 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
38459 \begin_layout Standard
38460 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
38465 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38475 \begin_layout Subsection
38476 Nomenclature Options
38477 \begin_inset Index idx
38482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38501 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
38508 \begin_layout Standard
38513 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
38514 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
38517 \begin_layout Description
38518 refeq Appends the phrase
38519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38534 to every nomenclature entry, where
38540 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
38543 \begin_layout Description
38544 refpage Appends the phrase
38545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38560 to every nomenclature entry, where
38566 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
38569 \begin_layout Description
38570 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
38573 \begin_layout Standard
38574 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
38575 class options list in the
38577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38581 In this document the options
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38589 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38596 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
38597 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
38602 field in the nomenclature dialog:
38605 \begin_layout Description
38615 \begin_layout Description
38618 nomrefpage Like the
38625 \begin_layout Description
38628 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
38637 \begin_layout Description
38641 \begin_inset space ~
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38652 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
38655 \begin_layout Standard
38657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38664 are automatically translated for most document languages.
38665 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
38669 \begin_layout Standard
38678 \begin_inset Newline newline
38684 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38688 \begin_inset space ~
38700 unskip, see equation
38703 \begin_inset Newline newline
38710 pagedeclaration}[1]{
38711 \begin_inset Newline newline
38717 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38738 \begin_layout Standard
38739 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
38742 \begin_inset space ~
38747 in the document settings under
38750 \begin_inset space ~
38758 \begin_layout Standard
38766 \begin_inset Newline newline
38770 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38774 \begin_inset space ~
38786 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
38788 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
38789 \begin_inset Newline newline
38796 pagedeclaration}[1]{
38797 \begin_inset Newline newline
38801 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38805 \begin_inset space ~
38817 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
38822 \begin_layout Subsection
38823 Printing the Nomenclature
38824 \begin_inset Index idx
38829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 \begin_layout Standard
38849 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
38851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38852 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
38857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38868 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
38869 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
38870 You can choose between these settings:
38873 \begin_layout Description
38874 Default a space of 1
38875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38881 \begin_layout Description
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38890 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
38893 \begin_layout Description
38894 Custom custom space
38897 \begin_layout Standard
38898 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
38899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38907 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
38915 For example, in order to change the name to
38919 , add the following line to the preamble:
38922 \begin_layout Standard
38935 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
38938 \begin_layout Standard
38939 When you are using another document language than English, replace
38940 \begin_inset Newline newline
38955 , where *** is the name of the language used.
38958 \begin_layout Subsection
38959 Nomenclature Program
38960 \begin_inset Index idx
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38967 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38984 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
38991 \begin_layout Standard
38997 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
38998 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
39000 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
39005 by adding options, see section
39006 \begin_inset space ~
39010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39012 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39017 The available options are listed and explained in
39018 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39020 key "nomencl,makeindex"
39028 \begin_layout Section
39030 \begin_inset Index idx
39035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39042 \begin_inset Index idx
39047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39066 name "sec:Branches"
39073 \begin_layout Standard
39074 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
39075 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
39076 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
39077 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
39080 \begin_layout Standard
39081 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
39082 allows you to put text into branches.
39083 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
39084 To create a branch, either select the menu
39086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39087 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
39090 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
39092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39099 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
39100 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
39101 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
39102 and whether the name of the branch should
39103 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
39104 (see below for an example).
39105 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
39106 to the name of the other) and to add
39107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39119 \begin_inset space ~
39122 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
39123 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
39126 \begin_layout Standard
39127 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
39128 These boxes are inserted via the menu
39130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39133 where you can choose a branch.
39134 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
39138 \begin_layout Standard
39139 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
39140 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
39143 \begin_layout Standard
39144 \begin_inset Branch Question
39148 \begin_layout Standard
39153 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
39161 \begin_layout Standard
39162 \begin_inset Branch Answer
39166 \begin_layout Standard
39171 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
39179 \begin_layout Standard
39186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39190 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
39191 Consider for example a file
39192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39199 which has the above branches.
39201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39208 is active, the PDF export file would be called
39209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39232 branch were inactive,
39233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39248 branch was active, likewise
39249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39264 branch was active, and
39265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39268 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
39269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39272 if both branches were active.
39273 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
39274 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
39280 \begin_layout Standard
39282 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
39283 It is also possible to
39284 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
39288 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
39290 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
39293 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
39298 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
39299 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
39303 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
39305 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
39308 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
39309 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
39313 \begin_inset space ~
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 \begin_inset Branch Answer
39326 \begin_layout Standard
39332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39339 branch is deactivated.
39345 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
39351 \begin_layout Standard
39352 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
39353 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
39354 definitions for each branch.
39355 For example you can define for the question branch
39359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39360 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39361 -syntax, see section
39362 \begin_inset space ~
39366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39368 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39380 \begin_layout Standard
39390 \begin_layout Standard
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 and for the answer branch
39404 \begin_layout Standard
39414 \begin_layout Standard
39424 \begin_layout Standard
39425 \begin_inset Branch Question
39429 \begin_layout Standard
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39461 \begin_layout Standard
39462 \begin_inset Branch Answer
39466 \begin_layout Standard
39470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39498 \begin_layout Standard
39499 Now it is possible to use the
39503 question{\SpecialChar ldots
39510 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
39513 commands to obtain conditional output.
39514 Here is an example formula where only the
39521 \begin_inset Formula
39523 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
39531 \begin_layout Standard
39532 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
39540 \begin_layout Standard
39541 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
39543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39547 \begin_inset space \space{}
39550 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
39552 For this advanced usage, see the
39558 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39561 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
39565 \begin_layout Standard
39567 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
39568 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close
39569 status of all branch insets in the document we provide
39574 function, which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined
39575 context menu of branch inset.
39580 \begin_layout Section
39582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39584 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
39589 \begin_inset Index idx
39594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39605 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
39610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39615 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
39618 allows you to set up
39619 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
39621 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
39625 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
39627 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
39631 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
39635 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
39640 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
39642 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
39646 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
39648 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
39651 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39653 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
39655 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
39663 \begin_inset Index idx
39668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39671 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39686 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
39687 which you need to enable by clicking
39689 Use Hyperref Support
39691 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
39692 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
39695 Customize Hyperref Options
39698 Among other things, hyperref
39699 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
39703 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
39705 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
39709 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
39713 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
39716 cross-references in the
39717 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
39721 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
39723 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
39727 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
39728 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
39731 table of contents entry or on a reference to
39732 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
39733 open a website or to
39735 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
39737 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
39738 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
39739 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
39744 \begin_layout Standard
39745 The header information in the dialog tab
39749 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
39750 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
39751 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
39754 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
39755 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
39772 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
39775 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39784 \begin_inset space ~
39788 \begin_inset space ~
39793 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
39796 \begin_layout Standard
39798 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
39800 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
39808 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
39809 you can customize the
39810 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
39812 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
39816 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
39818 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
39822 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
39823 , and you can specify
39826 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
39828 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
39829 will look and if links for
39831 bibliographical backreferences are created
39832 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
39838 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
39839 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_inset space ~
39853 \begin_inset space ~
39858 option allows long links to be split;
39861 \begin_inset space ~
39865 \begin_inset space ~
39869 \begin_inset space ~
39877 \begin_inset space ~
39882 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
39885 \begin_inset space ~
39890 colors the different links.
39891 The default colors are:
39894 \begin_layout Labeling
39895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
39900 for hyperlinks and URLs
39903 \begin_layout Labeling
39904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
39912 \begin_layout Labeling
39913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
39921 \begin_layout Standard
39922 but you can change these in the
39923 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
39925 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
39931 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
39933 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
39939 For example, in this document they were changed with the
39940 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
39944 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
39954 \begin_layout Quote
39957 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
39960 \begin_layout Standard
39962 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
39967 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
39968 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
39969 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
39974 \begin_layout Standard
39979 you can specify if PDF
39980 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
39982 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
39986 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
39987 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
39989 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
39990 readers to navigate through the document.
39991 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
39994 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
39996 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
40000 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
40006 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
40008 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
40010 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
40013 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
40022 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
40023 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
40024 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
40025 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
40026 when opening the PDF.
40030 \begin_inset space ~
40033 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40037 1 will only display the sections
40038 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
40039 (collapsing the rest)
40042 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
40046 \begin_layout Standard
40048 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
40053 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
40054 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
40056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40063 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
40064 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
40065 \begin_inset Flex Code
40068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
40080 , not via the package options.
40081 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
40082 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
40085 \begin_layout Quote
40087 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
40090 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
40091 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
40093 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
40099 \begin_layout Standard
40101 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
40104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40115 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
40120 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
40121 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
40123 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
40124 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
40126 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
40129 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
40132 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
40133 and not very well documented (look for a file called
40135 documentmetadata-support.pdf
40137 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
40138 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
40139 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
40142 \begin_layout Standard
40144 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
40145 PDF properties are also used in this document.
40146 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
40152 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
40153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40165 \begin_layout Section
40167 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40171 name "sec:TeX-Code"
40178 \begin_layout Subsection
40181 \begin_inset Index idx
40186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40196 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40203 \begin_layout Standard
40204 As \SpecialChar LyX
40205 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
40206 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
40207 commands and constructs,
40210 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
40211 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
40212 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
40213 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40214 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
40215 cannot support all packages and
40219 \begin_layout Standard
40220 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
40221 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
40222 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
40226 Code box is created by the menu
40228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40235 or by the toolbar button
40248 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40257 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
40259 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
40261 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
40265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40266 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
40271 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40278 , you can write the command part
40284 in a \SpecialChar TeX
40285 Code box before the word and the closing brace
40289 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
40290 Code box behind the word.
40291 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
40292 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
40296 \begin_layout Standard
40297 \begin_inset Graphics
40298 filename clipart/ERT.png
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40310 \begin_layout Standard
40311 This is a line with a
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40338 \begin_layout Standard
40339 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40347 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40348 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
40349 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
40350 know that the command is finished.
40358 \begin_layout Subsection
40359 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40361 \begin_inset Argument 1
40364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40365 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40372 \begin_inset Index idx
40377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40387 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40395 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
40396 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40397 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
40398 uses in the background.
40399 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
40400 is based on commands, you can
40401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40409 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
40410 any time if you know the right commands.
40411 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
40412 is the end of the day.
40413 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
40414 all caption labels bold.
40415 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
40417 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
40421 \begin_layout Standard
40422 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
40424 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40426 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40440 As result you find that the package
40445 \begin_inset Index idx
40450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40453 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
40470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40473 \SpecialChar menuseparator
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40485 \begin_layout Standard
40490 usepackage[options]{package name}
40493 \begin_layout Standard
40494 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
40495 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
40496 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
40497 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
40500 \begin_layout Standard
40501 In your case the package name is
40506 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
40511 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
40512 So you add the command
40515 \begin_layout Standard
40520 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
40523 \begin_layout Standard
40524 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
40528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40529 For more commands provided by the
40533 package, have a look at its documentation,
40534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40549 \begin_layout Standard
40550 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
40552 For example if you use a
40556 class, you don't need the package
40560 , you can instead write
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40568 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
40573 \begin_layout Standard
40574 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
40575 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
40576 documentation of the document class you want to use.
40583 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
40586 \begin_layout Standard
40587 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
40588 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
40590 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40591 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
40592 Code box as described in the previous
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
40598 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40601 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40603 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
40611 \begin_layout Standard
40612 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40632 \begin_inset Note Note
40635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40636 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
40644 \begin_layout Left Header
40645 \begin_inset Argument 1
40648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40668 \begin_inset Note Note
40671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40672 defines the header line as described below
40680 \begin_layout Center Header
40681 \begin_inset Argument 1
40684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40693 \begin_layout Right Header
40694 \begin_inset Argument 1
40697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40718 \begin_layout Left Footer
40719 \begin_inset Argument 1
40722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40743 \begin_layout Center Footer
40744 \begin_inset Argument 1
40747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40759 \begin_inset Newline newline
40763 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
40769 \begin_layout Right Footer
40770 \begin_inset Argument 1
40773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40795 \begin_layout Section
40796 Customized Page Headers and Footers
40797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40799 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
40804 \begin_inset Index idx
40809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40811 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40826 \begin_inset Index idx
40831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40840 \begin_layout Standard
40841 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40868 As a second step add in the menu
40870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40871 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40880 Custom Header/Footerlines
40883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40887 This module offers the following 6
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40894 \begin_layout Description
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40918 \begin_layout Description
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40942 \begin_layout Standard
40943 for the different positions in the header/footer.
40944 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
40947 \begin_layout Standard
40948 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
40949 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40957 reference "fig:Page-layout"
40961 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
40964 \begin_layout Standard
40965 \begin_inset Float figure
40972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40975 \begin_inset Tabular
40976 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
40977 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
40978 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
40979 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
40980 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
40982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
40985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
40994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41000 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41011 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41029 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41040 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
41043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 The normal text on the page goes here.
41045 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
41047 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
41048 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
41053 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41062 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41091 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
41114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
41123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41138 \begin_inset Caption Standard
41140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41143 name "fig:Page-layout"
41147 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
41160 \begin_layout Standard
41161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41169 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41178 is set to “Default”.
41179 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
41188 \begin_layout Subsection
41192 \begin_layout Standard
41193 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
41194 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
41195 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
41196 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
41198 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
41200 Defining the footer line works similarly.
41203 \begin_layout Standard
41204 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
41205 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
41209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41219 \begin_layout Description
41222 thepage prints the current page number
41225 \begin_layout Description
41228 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
41231 \begin_layout Description
41234 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
41237 \begin_layout Description
41240 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
41241 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
41244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41248 \begin_inset Quotes prd
41251 because it usually goes in a left header.
41254 \begin_layout Description
41257 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
41258 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
41260 It is normally used in the right header.
41263 \begin_layout Subsection
41264 Default header/footer
41267 \begin_layout Standard
41268 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
41269 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
41270 footer has the page number.
41271 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
41272 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
41273 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
41276 \begin_inset space ~
41284 \begin_layout Subsection
41288 \begin_layout Standard
41289 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
41290 Some pages are different.
41291 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
41292 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
41293 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
41294 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
41295 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
41298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41299 Header and footer decoration line
41302 \begin_layout Standard
41303 By default, you get a 0.4
41304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41307 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
41308 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
41320 in the following way:
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41330 headrulewidth}{thickness}
41333 \begin_layout Standard
41334 where thickness is a size in standard units like
41347 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
41348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41354 \begin_layout Standard
41355 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41357 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41373 Several header/footer lines
41376 \begin_layout Standard
41377 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
41378 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
41379 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
41381 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41407 \begin_layout Standard
41414 headheight}{height}
41417 \begin_layout Standard
41422 is a size in standard units (e.
41423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41427 \begin_inset space \space{}
41435 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
41436 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
41437 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41438 logfile with the menu
41440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41450 \begin_inset space ~
41455 to see if you can find a warning about the package
41460 \begin_inset Index idx
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41468 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
41484 for your header/footer.
41487 \begin_layout Subsection
41491 \begin_layout Standard
41492 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
41493 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
41494 This example consists of the following definition:
41497 \begin_layout Description
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41508 , empty optional argument
41511 \begin_layout Description
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41516 Header empty, empty optional argument
41519 \begin_layout Description
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41530 in the optional argument
41533 \begin_layout Description
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41544 in the optional argument
41547 \begin_layout Description
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41566 \begin_inset Newline newline
41570 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
41574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41577 in the optional argument
41580 \begin_layout Description
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41591 , empty optional argument
41594 \begin_layout Description
41597 headrulewidth set to 2
41598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41604 \begin_layout Standard
41605 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
41606 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
41612 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41623 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
41629 \begin_layout Standard
41633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41637 pagestyle{headings}
41643 \begin_inset Note Note
41646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41647 switches back to page style with the default headings
41655 \begin_layout Section
41656 Previewing Snippets of your Document
41657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41659 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41664 \begin_inset Index idx
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41676 \begin_inset Index idx
41681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41683 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41700 \begin_layout Standard
41702 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
41703 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
41704 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
41707 \begin_layout Subsection
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41712 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41718 \begin_inset Index idx
41723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41740 (on some systems named simply
41745 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
41747 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41754 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41756 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
41764 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
41765 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41766 -package are automatically
41767 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
41771 \begin_layout Subsection
41775 \begin_layout Standard
41776 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
41777 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
41779 activate the option
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41789 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41802 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41827 is the multiplication factor for the size.
41830 \begin_layout Standard
41831 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_layout Standard
41853 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
41854 and when you finish
41858 \begin_layout Standard
41859 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41867 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
41868 generated by activating the option
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41877 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
41885 \begin_layout Subsection
41886 Selected document parts
41889 \begin_layout Standard
41890 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
41891 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
41892 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
41893 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41895 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
41897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41901 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
41902 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
41903 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
41906 \begin_layout Standard
41907 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41914 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41926 is explained in section
41928 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41943 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
41944 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
41945 the final rotated boxes,
41946 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
41947 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
41949 Here is the result:
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41953 \begin_inset Preview
41955 \begin_layout Standard
41960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41964 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
41970 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
41980 height_special "totalheight"
41985 backgroundcolor "none"
41988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42013 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
42019 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 \begin_layout Standard
42042 Previewing works also for colors.
42043 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42062 is explained in section
42069 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_layout Standard
42083 \begin_inset Preview
42085 \begin_layout Standard
42089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42108 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
42113 This is text within a colored, framed box.
42117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 \begin_layout Standard
42133 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42139 \begin_layout Standard
42140 If \SpecialChar LyX
42141 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
42142 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
42143 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
42144 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42145 packages in your document preamble that are required by
42146 the \SpecialChar TeX
42148 If \SpecialChar LyX
42149 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
42150 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
42152 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
42153 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
42154 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
42157 \begin_layout Subsection
42162 \begin_layout Standard
42163 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42164 source of the whole document or parts of it.
42167 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42169 \begin_inset space ~
42174 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42176 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
42178 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
42179 's main window, then only this selection
42180 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
42181 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
42182 the source view window.
42187 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
42188 ; but note that if you have
42189 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
42191 not just the one which is open at the time.
42194 \begin_layout Section
42195 Advanced Find and Replace
42196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42198 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
42203 \begin_inset Index idx
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 \begin_inset Index idx
42220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42229 \begin_layout Subsection
42233 \begin_layout Standard
42234 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
42235 allows for searching of complex,
42236 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
42238 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
42239 The key-features are:
42242 \begin_layout Itemize
42243 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
42244 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
42245 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
42249 \begin_layout Itemize
42250 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
42251 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
42252 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
42253 a section heading will only be found within section headings
42256 \begin_layout Itemize
42257 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
42258 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
42259 outside of mathematics environments
42262 \begin_layout Itemize
42263 Search may be widened to a specific
42268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42272 \begin_inset space ~
42275 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
42276 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
42283 \begin_layout Itemize
42284 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
42285 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
42286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42293 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
42296 \begin_layout Subsection
42300 \begin_layout Standard
42301 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
42303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42316 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
42319 ) or the toolbar button
42322 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42328 Advanced Find and Replace
42333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42343 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42352 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
42355 arg "paragraph-break"
42359 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
42360 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
42364 arg "paragraph-break"
42367 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
42371 searches backwards.
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42378 \begin_inset space ~
42383 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
42392 \begin_inset space ~
42397 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
42400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42401 Searching for mathematics
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42405 Mathematical formulas, such as
42406 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
42409 or something more complex like
42410 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
42413 , may be searched for by typing them in the
42418 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
42419 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
42420 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
42421 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
42427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42431 \begin_layout Standard
42432 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
42433 This is done by switching to the
42437 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
42442 This way, entering in the
42449 \begin_layout Itemize
42450 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
42451 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
42454 \begin_layout Itemize
42455 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
42456 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
42459 \begin_layout Itemize
42460 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
42461 of it only within section headings.
42462 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
42463 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
42467 \begin_layout Itemize
42468 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
42469 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
42472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42476 \begin_layout Standard
42477 The entries made in the
42481 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42490 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
42494 button or alternatively press
42497 arg "paragraph-break"
42504 while the cursor is in the
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42515 \begin_layout Standard
42516 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
42518 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
42522 \begin_layout Itemize
42523 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
42524 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
42525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42532 with its typewriter version
42533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42547 \begin_layout Itemize
42548 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
42550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42554 \begin_inset Formula $R$
42558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42566 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
42570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42573 (you may want to enable the
42576 \begin_inset space ~
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42589 options and disable the
42597 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
42598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42605 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
42606 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
42610 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
42613 , or occurrences of
42614 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
42618 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
42624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42629 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
42633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42634 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
42636 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42638 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
42648 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
42654 This is done with the context menu
42656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42657 Insert Regular Expression
42659 while the cursor is in the
42664 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
42665 expression matching rules
42669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42670 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
42673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42680 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
42681 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
42687 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
42688 same text in the document.
42689 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
42690 Examples of using such a feature may be:
42693 \begin_layout Enumerate
42694 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
42699 editor the fraction
42700 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
42704 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
42707 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
42708 fractions with the given denominator.
42711 \begin_layout Enumerate
42712 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after
42713 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
42717 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
42720 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
42721 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
42727 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
42728 and the 'Select all'
42737 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
42742 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
42743 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
42744 Also, by inserting a
42745 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
42748 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
42749 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
42751 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
42752 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
42756 \begin_layout Description
42758 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
42759 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
42762 \begin_layout Description
42764 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
42766 \begin_inset space ~
42769 color colored text like cyan, yellow, etc
42772 \begin_layout Description
42774 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
42776 \begin_inset space ~
42779 family Roman, Sans serif, Typewriter
42782 \begin_layout Description
42784 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
42786 \begin_inset space ~
42793 \begin_layout Description
42795 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42801 upright, italic, ...
42804 \begin_layout Description
42806 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42815 \begin_layout Description
42817 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
42818 Emph/noun Semantic Markup: Emphasized, Noun
42821 \begin_layout Description
42823 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
42825 Single, Double, Wawy
42828 \begin_layout Description
42830 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
42831 Strike-through Single, With '/'
42834 \begin_layout Description
42836 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
42837 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
42840 \begin_layout Description
42842 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42848 title, part, chapter, section, ...
42853 \begin_layout Standard
42854 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
42855 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
42856 \begin_inset Formula $()$
42859 , and referring back to them through
42860 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
42864 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
42868 For example, try searching with the regexp
42869 \begin_inset Newline newline
42873 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
42885 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
42886 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
42891 \begin_inset Newline newline
42894 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
42897 \begin_layout Standard
42898 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
42899 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
42905 \begin_layout Standard
42906 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42914 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
42915 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
42916 sub-expressions is absolute.
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42922 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
42925 always refers to the first occurrence of
42926 \begin_inset Formula $()$
42929 in all entered regexps.
42937 \begin_layout Section
42939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42941 name "sec:Spellchecking"
42946 \begin_inset Index idx
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42960 \begin_layout Standard
42962 has a built-in spell checker.
42965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42972 key or the toolbar button
42975 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42978 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
42979 beginning of the currently selected text.
42980 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
42981 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
42982 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
42983 scrolled so that it is visible.
42984 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
42985 n, if any could be found.
42986 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
42990 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
42991 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42995 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
42998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43002 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
43003 a different one at the top of the dialog.
43005 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
43006 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
43009 \begin_inset space ~
43017 arg "dialog-show character"
43020 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
43022 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
43025 \begin_layout Standard
43026 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43027 can be downloaded from here:
43028 \begin_inset Newline newline
43032 \begin_inset Flex URL
43035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43037 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
43039 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
43040 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
43041 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
43049 \begin_inset Newline newline
43053 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
43055 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
43056 You should download
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43062 files for each language
43063 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
43068 link at the end of the opened webpage)
43071 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
43072 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43079 files into \SpecialChar LyX
43080 's installation subfolder
43088 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
43090 \begin_inset Newline newline
43093 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
43094 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
43095 but in most cases these are
43111 is the language code.
43114 \begin_layout Subsection
43118 \begin_layout Standard
43121 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43122 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43130 you can set the following things:
43133 \begin_layout Description
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
43139 should use for spell checking.
43140 Depending on your platform,
43150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43151 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
43152 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43170 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
43173 \begin_layout Description
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43178 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
43179 will always use the given language
43180 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
43183 \begin_layout Description
43185 \begin_inset space ~
43188 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
43190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43194 \begin_inset space \space{}
43198 This should normally not be needed.
43201 \begin_layout Description
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43207 \begin_inset space ~
43210 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
43212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43222 \begin_layout Description
43224 \begin_inset space ~
43227 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
43228 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
43229 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
43230 appear in a context menu.
43231 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
43235 \begin_layout Description
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43241 \begin_inset space ~
43245 \begin_inset space ~
43248 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
43252 \begin_layout Section
43254 \begin_inset Index idx
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43268 name "sec:Thesaurus"
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43277 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
43278 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43290 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
43300 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
43302 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
43303 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
43304 which are available for many languages.
43307 \begin_layout Standard
43308 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
43309 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
43313 \begin_layout Subsection
43314 Setting up the thesaurus
43317 \begin_layout Standard
43326 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
43330 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
43335 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
43337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43349 For instance, the US English files are named:
43352 \begin_layout Itemize
43356 \begin_layout Itemize
43360 \begin_layout Standard
43369 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
43370 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
43373 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43374 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43375 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43382 ) to the path where they are installed.
43386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43387 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
43388 ies, typical locations are
43394 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
43398 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
43402 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
43405 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
43411 LibreOffice-<Version>
43418 On the Mac, the default location is
43420 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
43421 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
43422 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
43423 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
43424 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
43425 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
43433 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
43434 during the \SpecialChar LyX
43435 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
43439 \begin_layout Standard
43440 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
43442 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
43444 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
43447 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
43448 \begin_inset Newline newline
43452 \begin_inset Flex URL
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43457 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
43459 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
43460 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
43461 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
43471 \begin_layout Standard
43472 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
43473 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
43475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43476 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43477 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43484 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
43486 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
43487 and point \SpecialChar LyX
43491 \begin_layout Standard
43492 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
43494 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
43497 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
43503 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
43506 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
43507 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
43509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43515 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43516 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43517 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43524 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
43527 \begin_layout Subsection
43528 Using the thesaurus
43531 \begin_layout Standard
43532 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
43534 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43537 or the toolbar button
43540 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43543 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
43545 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
43547 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
43548 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
43549 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
43558 ), related terms (such as
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43570 ), compounds (such as
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43582 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
43591 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
43594 \begin_layout Standard
43595 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
43596 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
43600 \begin_layout Standard
43601 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
43602 the dictionary, such as the above
43606 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
43607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43611 \begin_inset space \space{}
43614 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
43615 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
43616 For example, looking up the word form
43620 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
43625 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
43626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43630 \begin_inset space \space{}
43641 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
43642 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
43643 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
43646 \begin_layout Section
43648 \begin_inset Index idx
43653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43660 \begin_inset Index idx
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43667 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43684 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
43691 \begin_layout Standard
43692 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
43693 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
43694 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
43695 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
43697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43699 \begin_inset space ~
43702 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43712 \begin_layout Standard
43713 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
43727 The color depends on the author that made the change.
43728 You can change the color in
43730 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43731 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43742 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43748 \begin_inset Index idx
43753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43769 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
43770 's status bar when the
43771 cursor is in changed text.
43772 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
43775 arg "changes-merge"
43781 \begin_layout Standard
43782 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
43784 \begin_inset Index idx
43789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43791 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 \begin_layout Standard
43809 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43815 \begin_layout Standard
43816 \begin_inset Graphics
43817 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
43825 \begin_layout Standard
43826 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
43836 \begin_layout Standard
43837 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43843 \begin_layout Standard
43844 \begin_inset Tabular
43845 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
43846 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43847 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43848 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 arg "changes-track"
43866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43877 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43897 arg "changes-output"
43905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43916 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43918 \begin_inset space ~
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43956 Jumps to the next change
43962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 arg "change-accept"
43979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43990 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43992 \begin_inset space ~
44001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 arg "change-reject"
44018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44029 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44049 arg "changes-merge"
44057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44065 \begin_inset space ~
44068 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44088 arg "all-changes-accept"
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44107 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 arg "all-changes-reject"
44139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44150 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44156 \begin_inset space ~
44165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44189 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44223 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44241 \begin_layout Standard
44242 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44248 \begin_layout Standard
44249 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
44269 \begin_layout Standard
44270 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
44271 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
44272 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
44273 the next change after the current cursor position.
44274 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
44275 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
44276 step to the next change.
44277 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
44280 \begin_layout Standard
44281 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
44282 to describe a change.
44285 \begin_layout Standard
44287 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
44288 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44294 \begin_inset Index idx
44299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44302 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44317 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
44319 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44326 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44332 \begin_layout Section
44333 Comparison of Documents
44334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44336 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44341 \begin_inset Index idx
44346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 Comparison of documents
44355 \begin_layout Standard
44356 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
44359 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44363 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
44364 file with change tracking enabled showing the
44366 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
44368 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44414 enables the change tracking option
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44430 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
44433 \begin_layout Section
44434 International Support
44435 \begin_inset Index idx
44440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 International support
44449 \begin_layout Standard
44450 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
44451 with any language you want.
44452 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
44453 up \SpecialChar LyX
44455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44457 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
44465 \begin_layout Standard
44466 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
44467 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44474 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
44481 \begin_layout Subsection
44483 \begin_inset Index idx
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44490 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 \begin_inset Index idx
44510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44512 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44527 \begin_inset Index idx
44532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44534 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44551 \begin_layout Standard
44554 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44555 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44558 dialog lets you set
44560 the language, the quote style and character encoding
44565 \begin_layout Standard
44570 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44575 \begin_inset space ~
44580 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
44581 For details about the different encoding options see section
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44588 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44595 \begin_layout Subsection
44596 Keyboard mapping configuration
44597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44599 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
44606 \begin_layout Standard
44607 If you have for example a U.
44608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44611 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
44612 can use an alternate keymap.
44613 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
44618 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44619 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44620 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
44623 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44630 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44635 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
44636 which one you want to use.
44639 \begin_layout Standard
44640 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
44641 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
44642 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
44643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44646 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
44647 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
44648 one to support the characters you want.
44649 This and many other customizations are explained in the
44656 \begin_layout Chapter
44659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44661 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
44668 \begin_layout Standard
44669 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
44670 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
44671 topic inside the user's guide.
44674 \begin_layout Section
44676 \begin_inset Index idx
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44683 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44700 \begin_layout Standard
44705 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
44708 \begin_layout Subsection
44712 \begin_layout Standard
44713 Creates a new document.
44716 \begin_layout Subsection
44720 \begin_layout Standard
44721 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
44722 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
44723 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
44725 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
44726 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
44732 \begin_layout Subsection
44736 \begin_layout Standard
44740 \begin_layout Subsection
44744 \begin_layout Standard
44745 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
44746 Click there on a file to open it.
44749 \begin_layout Subsection
44751 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
44755 \begin_layout Standard
44757 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
44758 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
44762 \begin_layout Subsection
44766 \begin_layout Standard
44767 Closes the current document.
44770 \begin_layout Subsection
44774 \begin_layout Standard
44775 Closes all opened documents.
44778 \begin_layout Subsection
44782 \begin_layout Standard
44783 Saves the actual document.
44786 \begin_layout Subsection
44790 \begin_layout Standard
44791 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
44792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
44796 \begin_layout Subsection
44798 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
44802 \begin_layout Standard
44804 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
44805 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
44811 \begin_layout Subsection
44815 \begin_layout Standard
44816 Saves all opened documents.
44819 \begin_layout Subsection
44823 \begin_layout Standard
44824 Reloads the actual document from disk.
44827 \begin_layout Subsection
44831 \begin_layout Standard
44832 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
44833 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
44834 It is described in the section
44836 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
44841 Additional Features
44846 \begin_layout Subsection
44850 \begin_layout Standard
44851 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
44852 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
44854 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
44855 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
44859 \begin_layout Standard
44860 When using the menu entry
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44868 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
44872 \begin_inset space ~
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44880 \begin_inset space ~
44885 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
44886 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
44889 \begin_layout Subsection
44891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44893 name "subsec:Export"
44900 \begin_layout Standard
44901 You can export your document to various file formats.
44902 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44904 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
44905 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
44906 during its configuration.
44909 \begin_layout Standard
44910 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
44912 \begin_inset space ~
44916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44918 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44925 \begin_layout Description
44931 \begin_inset space ~
44934 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44939 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
44940 \begin_inset Newline newline
44943 Since \SpecialChar LyX
44944 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
44948 \begin_layout Description
44949 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
44955 \begin_layout Description
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44960 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
44966 \begin_layout Description
44967 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
44968 's native DVI-format.
44969 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
44970 files paths or file names in your document.
44972 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
44979 \begin_layout Description
44980 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
44981 in files paths or file names
44984 \begin_layout Description
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44993 ) DVI-format using the program
44995 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44998 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
45002 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
45018 \begin_layout Description
45020 \begin_inset space ~
45023 (cropped) the same as
45027 but with cropped page margins.
45030 \begin_layout Description
45032 \begin_inset space ~
45035 Dot text file with code in the programming language
45039 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
45044 \begin_layout Description
45048 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45056 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
45064 \begin_layout Description
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45073 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
45077 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
45085 \begin_layout Description
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45098 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45099 source that is compilable with the program
45101 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45105 \begin_layout Description
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45114 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45115 source, additionally all images used in the document
45116 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
45120 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
45123 \begin_layout Description
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45132 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45133 source code, additionally all images used in the document
45134 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
45142 \begin_layout Description
45146 \begin_inset space ~
45155 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45156 source that is compilable with the program
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45175 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45176 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
45182 \begin_layout Description
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45187 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
45188 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
45190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45194 \begin_inset space \space{}
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45218 represent the version number)
45221 \begin_layout Description
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45227 \begin_inset space ~
45230 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
45231 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
45232 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45236 \begin_layout Description
45237 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
45238 's internal XHTML engine
45241 \begin_layout Description
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45255 \begin_inset space ~
45258 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
45263 For the conversion the program
45272 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
45275 \begin_layout Description
45276 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
45281 \begin_layout Description
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45286 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
45288 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
45291 For the conversion the program
45300 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
45303 \begin_layout Description
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45308 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
45309 For the conversion the program
45318 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
45321 \begin_layout Description
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45326 (cropped) the same as
45329 \begin_inset space ~
45334 but with cropped page margins
45337 \begin_layout Description
45341 \begin_inset space ~
45346 PDF-format using the program
45350 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
45353 \begin_layout Description
45357 \begin_inset space ~
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45374 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
45375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45379 \begin_inset space \space{}
45382 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
45386 \begin_layout Description
45390 \begin_inset space ~
45395 PDF-format using the program
45397 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45400 , produces PDF-files directly
45403 \begin_layout Description
45407 \begin_inset space ~
45412 PDF-format using the program
45416 , produces PDF-files directly
45419 \begin_layout Description
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45428 PDF-format using the program
45432 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
45435 \begin_layout Description
45439 \begin_inset space ~
45444 PDF-format using the program
45449 , produces PDF-files directly
45452 \begin_layout Description
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45464 \begin_layout Description
45468 \begin_inset space ~
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45477 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
45478 and then exported as text using the program
45483 \begin_layout Description
45488 PostScript format using the program
45496 options see section
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45503 reference "subsec:General-output"
45510 \begin_layout Description
45511 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45512 source and also code in the statistical programming
45526 it is possible to use
45530 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
45534 \begin_layout Standard
45535 If one of the menu entries
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45551 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45553 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45561 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
45566 \begin_inset Index idx
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45572 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45581 \begin_layout Subsection
45585 \begin_layout Standard
45586 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
45587 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
45590 \begin_inset space ~
45594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45596 reference "sec:Paths"
45601 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
45610 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
45611 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
45612 's preferences as described in section
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45619 reference "subsec:Converters"
45626 \begin_layout Subsection
45627 New and Close Window
45630 \begin_layout Standard
45631 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45635 \begin_layout Subsection
45639 \begin_layout Standard
45640 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
45643 \begin_layout Section
45645 \begin_inset Index idx
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45669 \begin_layout Subsection
45673 \begin_layout Standard
45674 Described in section
45675 \begin_inset space ~
45679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45681 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
45688 \begin_layout Subsection
45689 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
45692 \begin_layout Standard
45693 Described in section
45694 \begin_inset space ~
45698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45700 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
45707 \begin_layout Subsection
45711 \begin_layout Standard
45712 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
45713 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
45716 \begin_layout Subsection
45720 \begin_layout Standard
45721 Selects the whole document.
45724 \begin_layout Subsection
45725 Find & Replace (Quick)
45728 \begin_layout Standard
45729 Described in section
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45736 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
45743 \begin_layout Subsection
45744 Find & Replace (Advanced)
45747 \begin_layout Standard
45748 Described in section
45749 \begin_inset space ~
45753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45755 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
45762 \begin_layout Subsection
45763 Move Paragraph Up/Down
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45767 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
45771 \begin_layout Subsection
45773 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
45777 \begin_layout Standard
45779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
45780 Described in section
45781 \begin_inset space ~
45785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45787 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
45796 \begin_layout Subsection
45798 \begin_inset Index idx
45803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45822 \begin_layout Standard
45823 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
45824 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45829 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
45830 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
45836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45837 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45839 \begin_inset space ~
45845 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
45849 \begin_layout Subsection
45851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
45855 \begin_layout Standard
45857 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
45858 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
45863 \begin_layout Enumerate
45865 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
45866 Customize text properties by means of the
45872 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
45875 ; this is described in section
45876 \begin_inset space ~
45880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45882 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
45889 \begin_layout Enumerate
45891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
45892 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
45894 Apply last settings
45897 \begin_layout Enumerate
45899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
45900 Change the casing of selected text (
45915 \begin_layout Subsection
45917 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
45921 \begin_layout Standard
45923 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
45924 This sub-menu only appears
45925 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
45927 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
45928 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
45951 \begin_inset space ~
45955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45957 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
45966 \begin_layout Subsection
45967 Table and Rows & Columns
45970 \begin_layout Standard
45971 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
45972 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
45973 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
45976 \begin_layout Subsection
45980 \begin_layout Standard
45981 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
45982 It will dissolve this inset.
45983 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
45987 \begin_layout Subsection
45991 \begin_layout Standard
45992 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
45993 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
45996 \begin_layout Subsection
45997 Increase/Decrease List Depth
46000 \begin_layout Standard
46001 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
46003 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
46004 \begin_inset space ~
46008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46010 reference "sec:Nesting"
46015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46017 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46024 \begin_layout Section
46026 \begin_inset Index idx
46031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46033 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46050 \begin_layout Standard
46051 At the bottom of the
46055 menu the opened documents are listed.
46058 \begin_layout Subsection
46059 Open/Close all Insets
46062 \begin_layout Standard
46063 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
46066 \begin_layout Subsection
46067 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
46070 \begin_layout Standard
46071 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
46074 \begin_layout Standard
46075 Math macros are described in the
46082 \begin_layout Subsection
46086 \begin_layout Standard
46087 Shows the outline window as described in sections
46088 \begin_inset space ~
46092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46094 reference "sec:Navigating"
46099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46101 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
46108 \begin_layout Subsection
46112 \begin_layout Standard
46113 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
46115 \begin_inset space ~
46119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46121 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46128 \begin_layout Subsection
46132 \begin_layout Standard
46133 Opens a window showing console messages.
46134 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
46136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46139 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
46140 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
46141 is processing the document.
46144 \begin_layout Subsection
46146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46148 name "subsec:Toolbars"
46153 \begin_inset Index idx
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46167 \begin_layout Standard
46168 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
46170 All toolbars and the
46173 \begin_inset space ~
46191 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
46193 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
46195 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
46199 \begin_layout Standard
46201 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
46205 \begin_inset space ~
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46240 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
46243 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
46247 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
46249 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
46263 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
46264 denoted in the menu with the suffix
46273 \begin_layout Standard
46278 state the toolbar is permanently shown
46279 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
46284 state it is never shown
46290 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
46291 or when a certain feature is enabled.
46292 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
46293 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
46294 is inside a formula or table respectively
46295 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
46296 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46303 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46310 reference "sec:Toolbars"
46317 \begin_layout Subsection
46321 \begin_layout Standard
46325 \begin_inset space ~
46329 \begin_inset space ~
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46337 \begin_inset space ~
46341 \begin_inset space ~
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46350 will split \SpecialChar LyX
46351 's main window vertically while
46354 \begin_inset space ~
46358 \begin_inset space ~
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46366 \begin_inset space ~
46370 \begin_inset space ~
46374 \begin_inset space ~
46379 will split it horizontally.
46380 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
46381 to view the same document, but at different positions.
46382 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
46383 three or more documents at the same time.
46384 To close a split view, use the menu
46387 \begin_inset space ~
46391 \begin_inset space ~
46399 \begin_layout Subsection
46403 \begin_layout Standard
46404 Closes a split view.
46407 \begin_layout Subsection
46411 \begin_layout Standard
46412 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
46413 so that you will see nothing but your text.
46414 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
46415 's main window fullscreen.
46416 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
46417 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
46420 \begin_layout Section
46422 \begin_inset Index idx
46427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46429 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46446 \begin_layout Subsection
46450 \begin_layout Standard
46451 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
46452 \begin_inset space ~
46456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46458 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
46469 \begin_layout Subsection
46471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46473 name "subsec:Special-Character"
46480 \begin_layout Standard
46481 Here you can insert the following characters:
46484 \begin_layout Description
46489 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
46492 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
46493 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46494 -packages you have installed.
46495 You can get a complete display by checking
46498 \begin_inset space ~
46504 \begin_inset Newline newline
46508 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46516 Not all characters will be visible in the
46520 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
46521 dialog (see section
46522 \begin_inset space ~
46526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46528 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46532 ) can display every character.
46540 \begin_layout Description
46541 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
46545 \begin_layout Description
46547 \begin_inset space ~
46551 \begin_inset space ~
46554 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
46555 \begin_inset space ~
46559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46561 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
46568 \begin_layout Description
46570 \begin_inset space ~
46573 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
46576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46583 \begin_layout Description
46585 \begin_inset space ~
46588 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
46591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46598 \begin_layout Description
46600 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
46602 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46609 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
46610 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
46612 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
46615 line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
46619 \begin_layout Description
46621 \begin_inset space ~
46624 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
46628 \begin_layout Description
46630 \begin_inset space ~
46634 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
46635 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
46641 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
46646 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
46648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46652 \begin_inset space \space{}
46655 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
46656 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
46662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46665 To insert a fraction use the command
46670 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
46674 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
46680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46683 The visible space is hereby the character before the
46690 \begin_layout Description
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46695 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
46699 \begin_layout Description
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46705 \begin_inset Index idx
46710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46717 \begin_inset Index idx
46722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46724 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46738 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
46739 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
46741 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46747 \begin_inset Index idx
46752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46755 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46770 \begin_inset Newline newline
46773 More information about this feature can be found in the
46779 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46785 \begin_layout Description
46786 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
46788 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
46789 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
46793 \begin_layout Subsection
46797 \begin_layout Standard
46798 Opens a submenu with the following options:
46801 \begin_layout Description
46802 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
46803 \begin_inset script superscript
46805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46814 \begin_layout Description
46815 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
46816 \begin_inset script subscript
46818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46827 \begin_layout Description
46829 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
46831 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
46835 \begin_inset space ~
46839 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
46841 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
46844 space as described in section
46845 \begin_inset space ~
46849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46851 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
46858 \begin_layout Description
46860 \begin_inset space ~
46863 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
46864 \begin_inset space ~
46868 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
46870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46872 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
46877 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
46879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46881 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
46890 \begin_layout Description
46892 \begin_inset space ~
46895 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46902 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
46909 \begin_layout Description
46911 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46916 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
46918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46922 \begin_inset space \space{}
46925 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
46926 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
46932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46935 To insert a fraction use the command
46940 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
46944 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
46950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46953 The visible space is hereby the character before the
46962 \begin_layout Description
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46967 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
46968 \begin_inset space ~
46972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46974 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46986 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46993 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
47000 \begin_layout Description
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47005 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
47006 \begin_inset space ~
47010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47012 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
47019 \begin_layout Description
47020 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
47021 \begin_inset space ~
47025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47027 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
47034 \begin_layout Description
47036 \begin_inset space ~
47039 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47046 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
47053 \begin_layout Description
47055 \begin_inset space ~
47058 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
47059 \begin_inset space ~
47063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47065 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
47072 \begin_layout Description
47074 \begin_inset space ~
47078 \begin_inset space ~
47081 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
47084 \begin_inset space ~
47088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47090 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
47097 for a usage example.
47100 \begin_layout Description
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47106 \begin_inset space ~
47109 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47116 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
47123 \begin_layout Description
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47128 Break Inserts a forced line break that
47129 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
47132 justifies the remaining text as described in section
47133 \begin_inset space ~
47137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47139 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
47146 \begin_layout Description
47148 \begin_inset space ~
47151 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47158 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
47165 \begin_layout Description
47167 \begin_inset space ~
47170 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
47171 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
47173 \begin_inset space ~
47177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47179 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
47184 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
47188 \begin_layout Description
47190 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
47192 \begin_inset space ~
47196 \begin_inset space ~
47199 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47200 to prevent a page break at the given position.
47202 \begin_inset space ~
47206 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
47208 \begin_inset space ~
47212 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
47214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47216 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
47225 \begin_layout Description
47227 \begin_inset space ~
47230 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
47231 \begin_inset space ~
47235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47237 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
47244 \begin_layout Description
47246 \begin_inset space ~
47250 \begin_inset space ~
47253 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
47254 \begin_inset space ~
47258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47260 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
47267 \begin_layout Subsection
47269 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47273 \begin_layout Standard
47275 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47276 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
47277 The submenu allows you to insert
47280 \begin_layout Description
47282 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47287 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
47290 \begin_layout Description
47292 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47294 \begin_inset space ~
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47301 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
47305 \begin_layout Description
47307 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47312 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
47315 \begin_layout Description
47317 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47322 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
47325 \begin_layout Description
47327 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47333 \begin_inset space ~
47336 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
47340 \begin_layout Description
47342 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47347 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
47350 \begin_layout Description
47352 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
47354 \begin_inset space ~
47358 \begin_inset space ~
47362 \begin_inset space ~
47365 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
47368 \begin_layout Description
47370 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
47372 \begin_inset space ~
47376 \begin_inset space ~
47379 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
47381 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
47384 \begin_layout Description
47386 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47388 \begin_inset space ~
47391 Name inserts the user name as specified in
47393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47394 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47400 \begin_layout Description
47402 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47404 \begin_inset space ~
47407 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
47409 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47410 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47416 \begin_layout Description
47418 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
47419 Other\SpecialChar ldots
47420 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
47421 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
47424 \begin_layout Subsection
47427 List/Contents/References
47430 \begin_layout Standard
47431 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47456 are described in section
47457 \begin_inset space ~
47461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47463 reference "sec:toc"
47472 is described in section
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47479 reference "sec:Index"
47487 is described in section
47488 \begin_inset space ~
47492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47494 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
47500 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47503 is described in section
47504 \begin_inset space ~
47508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47510 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47517 \begin_layout Subsection
47521 \begin_layout Standard
47522 To insert floats, as described in section
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47529 reference "sec:Floats"
47533 and in detail the chapter
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47548 \begin_layout Subsection
47552 \begin_layout Standard
47553 To insert notes, described in section
47554 \begin_inset space ~
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47560 reference "sec:Notes"
47567 \begin_layout Subsection
47571 \begin_layout Standard
47572 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
47574 Branches are described in section
47575 \begin_inset space ~
47579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47581 reference "sec:Branches"
47588 \begin_layout Subsection
47592 \begin_layout Standard
47593 Inserts document class-specific insets.
47594 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
47596 An example is the document class
47597 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
47599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47607 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
47611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47616 with three custom insets.
47619 Flex insets and InsetLayout
47623 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
47629 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
47632 \begin_layout Subsection
47634 \begin_inset Index idx
47639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47648 \begin_layout Standard
47649 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
47651 For more information see chapter
47653 External Document Parts
47656 \begin_inset space ~
47662 \begin_layout Subsection
47664 \begin_inset Index idx
47669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47678 \begin_layout Standard
47679 Inserts a box in a certain style.
47680 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47695 \begin_layout Subsection
47699 \begin_layout Standard
47704 dialog as described in section
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47711 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47718 \begin_layout Subsection
47722 \begin_layout Standard
47727 as described in section
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47734 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47741 \begin_layout Subsection
47745 \begin_layout Standard
47750 as described in section
47751 \begin_inset space ~
47755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47757 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47764 \begin_layout Subsection
47766 \begin_inset Index idx
47771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47778 \begin_inset Index idx
47783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47795 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47812 \begin_layout Standard
47813 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
47814 Floats are described in section
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47821 reference "sec:Floats"
47825 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
47828 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
47836 \begin_inset space ~
47844 \begin_layout Subsection
47848 \begin_layout Standard
47849 Inserts an index entry as described in section
47850 \begin_inset space ~
47854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47856 reference "sec:Index"
47863 \begin_layout Subsection
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47868 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
47869 \begin_inset space ~
47873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47875 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
47882 \begin_layout Subsection
47886 \begin_layout Standard
47887 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
47888 Tables are described in section
47889 \begin_inset space ~
47893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47895 reference "sec:Tables"
47899 and in detail in the chapter
47906 \begin_inset space ~
47914 \begin_layout Subsection
47918 \begin_layout Standard
47924 Graphics are described in section
47925 \begin_inset space ~
47929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47931 reference "sec:Graphics"
47938 \begin_layout Subsection
47942 \begin_layout Standard
47943 Inserts a URL as described in section
47944 \begin_inset space ~
47948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47950 reference "subsec:URLs"
47957 \begin_layout Subsection
47961 \begin_layout Standard
47962 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
47963 \begin_inset space ~
47967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47969 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
47976 \begin_layout Subsection
47980 \begin_layout Standard
47981 Inserts a footnote as described in section
47982 \begin_inset space ~
47986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47988 reference "sec:Footnotes"
47995 \begin_layout Subsection
47999 \begin_layout Standard
48000 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48007 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
48014 \begin_layout Subsection
48017 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
48020 \begin_layout Standard
48021 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
48022 environments of the same type.
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48030 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
48034 for an explanation.
48037 \begin_layout Subsection
48041 \begin_layout Standard
48042 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
48043 title or caption of a float.
48044 Inserts a short title as described in section
48045 \begin_inset space ~
48049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48051 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
48058 \begin_layout Subsection
48063 \begin_layout Standard
48064 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
48065 Code box as described in section
48066 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48072 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
48079 \begin_layout Subsection
48081 \begin_inset Index idx
48086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48095 \begin_layout Standard
48096 Inserts a program listings box.
48097 Program listings are explained in the chapter
48099 Program Code Listings
48104 \begin_inset space ~
48112 \begin_layout Subsection
48114 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
48118 \begin_layout Standard
48120 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
48121 Inserts the actual date.
48122 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
48129 \begin_layout Subsection
48133 \begin_layout Standard
48134 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
48135 \begin_inset space ~
48139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48141 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48148 \begin_layout Section
48150 \begin_inset Index idx
48155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48157 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48174 \begin_layout Standard
48175 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
48176 \begin_inset space ~
48179 of the current document.
48180 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
48183 \begin_layout Subsection
48187 \begin_layout Standard
48188 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
48189 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
48190 to jump, for example, between section
48191 \begin_inset space ~
48195 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48199 2.5 and use the submenu
48202 \begin_inset space ~
48206 \begin_inset space ~
48213 \begin_inset space ~
48219 \begin_inset space ~
48223 \begin_inset space ~
48229 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
48233 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
48239 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
48242 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
48245 \begin_layout Standard
48247 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
48248 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
48254 \begin_inset space ~
48259 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
48262 \begin_inset space ~
48267 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
48270 \begin_layout Subsection
48271 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
48274 \begin_layout Standard
48275 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
48279 \begin_layout Subsection
48283 \begin_layout Standard
48284 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
48285 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
48286 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
48290 \begin_inset space ~
48294 \begin_inset space ~
48302 \begin_layout Subsection
48306 \begin_layout Standard
48307 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
48310 The \SpecialChar LyX
48311 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
48313 \begin_inset space ~
48321 \begin_inset space ~
48326 manual for a detailed description.
48329 \begin_layout Section
48331 \begin_inset Index idx
48336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48355 \begin_layout Subsection
48359 \begin_layout Standard
48360 Change Tracking is described in section
48361 \begin_inset space ~
48365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48367 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48374 \begin_layout Subsection
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48383 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
48384 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
48385 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48387 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
48388 to the clipboard or update the view.
48389 \begin_inset Newline newline
48392 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48396 \begin_layout Standard
48399 Open Containing Directory
48401 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
48402 's temporary folder for the document.
48403 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
48404 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
48405 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
48406 For example some journals require to send the
48410 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48414 \begin_layout Subsection
48415 Start Appendix Here
48418 \begin_layout Standard
48419 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
48420 as described in section
48421 \begin_inset space ~
48425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48427 reference "sec:Appendices"
48434 \begin_layout Subsection
48436 \begin_inset space ~
48442 \begin_layout Standard
48443 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
48444 default output format for the document (menu
48446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48447 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48448 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
48450 \begin_inset space ~
48454 \begin_inset space ~
48460 \begin_inset space ~
48464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48466 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
48470 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
48473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48474 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48476 \begin_inset space ~
48479 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48481 \begin_inset space ~
48484 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48486 \begin_inset space ~
48490 \begin_inset space ~
48496 \begin_inset space ~
48500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48502 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48506 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
48507 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
48509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48510 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48512 \begin_inset space ~
48515 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48517 \begin_inset space ~
48520 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48524 \begin_inset space ~
48528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48530 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48535 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
48536 when it is first configured.
48537 The default output format is
48540 \begin_inset space ~
48548 \begin_layout Subsection
48549 View (Other Formats)
48552 \begin_layout Standard
48553 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
48554 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
48555 actual document with an external program.
48556 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
48557 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48558 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
48560 All possible formats are listed in section
48561 \begin_inset space ~
48565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48567 reference "subsec:Export"
48572 You should at least see the menu entry
48577 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48579 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
48581 \begin_inset space ~
48585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48587 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48592 \begin_inset Index idx
48597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48598 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48607 \begin_layout Standard
48608 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
48609 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
48611 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48612 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48617 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48619 \begin_inset space ~
48622 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48626 \begin_inset space ~
48630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48632 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48637 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
48638 when it is first configured.
48641 \begin_layout Subsection
48643 \begin_inset space ~
48649 \begin_layout Standard
48650 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
48651 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
48654 \begin_layout Subsection
48655 Update (Other Formats)
48658 \begin_layout Standard
48659 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
48660 your document without opening a new viewer window.
48663 \begin_layout Subsection
48664 View Master Document
48667 \begin_layout Standard
48668 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
48670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48684 \begin_inset space ~
48689 manual for more information on this topic).
48690 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
48691 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
48695 \begin_inset space ~
48699 \begin_inset space ~
48704 generates the output of the whole book, while
48708 will just output the chapter alone.
48711 \begin_layout Standard
48712 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
48713 in the document settings (menu
48715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48717 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
48719 \begin_inset space ~
48723 \begin_inset space ~
48729 \begin_inset space ~
48733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48735 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
48739 ) or in the preferences (menu
48741 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48742 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48744 \begin_inset space ~
48747 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48749 \begin_inset space ~
48752 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48754 \begin_inset space ~
48758 \begin_inset space ~
48764 \begin_inset space ~
48768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48770 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48777 \begin_layout Subsection
48778 Update Master Document
48781 \begin_layout Standard
48782 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
48784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48803 manual for more information on this topic).
48804 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
48805 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
48808 \begin_layout Standard
48809 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
48810 in the document settings (menu
48812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48813 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48814 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
48816 \begin_inset space ~
48820 \begin_inset space ~
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48832 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
48836 ) or in the preferences (menu
48838 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48839 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48841 \begin_inset space ~
48844 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48846 \begin_inset space ~
48849 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
48851 \begin_inset space ~
48855 \begin_inset space ~
48861 \begin_inset space ~
48865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48867 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48874 \begin_layout Subsection
48876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48878 name "subsec:Compressed"
48885 \begin_layout Standard
48886 Un/compresses the current document.
48887 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
48888 compression (see the
48890 Additional Features
48892 manual for details).
48895 \begin_layout Subsection
48899 \begin_layout Standard
48900 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
48903 \begin_layout Subsection
48907 \begin_layout Standard
48908 The document settings are described in appendix
48909 \begin_inset space ~
48913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48915 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
48922 \begin_layout Section
48924 \begin_inset Index idx
48929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48948 \begin_layout Subsection
48952 \begin_layout Standard
48953 Spell checking is explained in section
48954 \begin_inset space ~
48958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48960 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48967 \begin_layout Subsection
48971 \begin_layout Standard
48972 The thesaurus is described in section
48973 \begin_inset space ~
48977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48979 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
48986 \begin_layout Subsection
48988 \begin_inset Index idx
48993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49000 \begin_inset Index idx
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49014 \begin_layout Standard
49015 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
49016 the highlighted document part.
49019 \begin_layout Subsection
49025 \begin_inset Index idx
49030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49031 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
49040 \begin_layout Standard
49041 Generates with the help of the program
49043 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
49046 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
49047 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
49048 This feature is not available on Windows.
49051 \begin_layout Subsection
49057 \begin_inset Index idx
49062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49072 \begin_layout Standard
49073 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49078 \begin_inset space ~
49083 to see the full filename paths.
49086 \begin_layout Subsection
49088 \begin_inset Index idx
49093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49102 \begin_layout Standard
49103 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
49104 files as described in section
49105 \begin_inset space ~
49109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49111 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
49118 \begin_layout Subsection
49120 \begin_inset Index idx
49125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49128 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49138 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
49141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49142 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
49154 \begin_inset Index idx
49159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49160 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
49169 \begin_layout Standard
49170 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
49171 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
49172 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49173 -packages and programs it needs; see
49175 \begin_inset space ~
49179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49181 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
49188 \begin_layout Subsection
49192 \begin_layout Standard
49197 dialog as described in detail in appendix
49198 \begin_inset space ~
49202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49204 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49211 \begin_layout Section
49213 \begin_inset Index idx
49218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49220 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49237 \begin_layout Standard
49238 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
49239 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
49241 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
49245 \begin_layout Standard
49249 \begin_inset space ~
49254 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
49255 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49256 packages and classes found
49257 by \SpecialChar LyX
49259 \begin_inset space ~
49263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49265 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
49272 \begin_layout Standard
49276 \begin_inset space ~
49281 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
49286 \begin_layout Section
49288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49290 name "sec:Toolbars"
49297 \begin_layout Standard
49298 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
49299 \begin_inset space ~
49303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49305 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
49312 \begin_layout Standard
49313 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
49314 This is described in the
49316 Additional Features
49321 \begin_layout Subsection
49323 \begin_inset Index idx
49328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49330 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49347 \begin_layout Standard
49348 \begin_inset Graphics
49349 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
49357 \begin_layout Standard
49358 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49364 \begin_layout Standard
49365 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
49370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49382 \begin_inset Note Note
49385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49386 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
49391 manual for more information.
49399 \begin_layout Standard
49400 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49406 \begin_layout Standard
49407 \begin_inset Tabular
49408 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
49409 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49417 \begin_inset Graphics
49418 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
49428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49432 pull-down box for the environments
49445 \begin_layout Standard
49446 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
49452 \begin_layout Standard
49454 \begin_inset Tabular
49455 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
49456 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49457 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49458 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49482 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49512 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49542 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49558 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
49566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49588 arg "spelling-continuously"
49596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49600 Spellcheck continuously
49606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49629 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49659 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49689 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49719 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49749 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49751 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
49756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49774 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
49782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49788 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49814 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
49822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49856 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
49864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49870 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49871 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
49878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49899 Emphasize text, function of the
49900 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
49903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49905 \begin_inset space ~
49908 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
49910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
49916 arg "dialog-show character"
49927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49948 Set text to noun style, function of the
49949 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
49952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49954 \begin_inset space ~
49957 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
49959 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
49965 arg "dialog-show character"
49976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49982 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
49985 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
49993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49998 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
50001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
50019 arg "textstyle-apply"
50029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50034 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
50035 Format text using the current settings in the
50037 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50039 \begin_inset space ~
50042 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
50053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50077 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
50079 \begin_inset space ~
50088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50097 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
50105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50125 arg "tabular-insert"
50133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50152 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
50155 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
50163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50168 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
50171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50187 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
50195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50199 Toggle outline window on/off,
50201 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50217 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
50225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50229 Toggle math toolbar on/off
50235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50244 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
50252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50256 Toggle table toolbar on/off
50269 \begin_layout Subsection
50271 \begin_inset Index idx
50276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50295 \begin_layout Standard
50296 \begin_inset Graphics
50297 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
50305 \begin_layout Standard
50306 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50312 \begin_layout Standard
50313 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
50317 \begin_layout Standard
50318 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50324 \begin_layout Standard
50325 \begin_inset Tabular
50326 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
50327 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
50328 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50329 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50330 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50366 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
50374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50393 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
50401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50420 arg "layout-toggle List"
50428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50447 arg "layout-toggle Description"
50455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50474 arg "depth-increment"
50482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50488 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50490 \begin_inset space ~
50494 \begin_inset space ~
50503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50512 arg "depth-decrement"
50520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50526 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50528 \begin_inset space ~
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50550 arg "float-insert figure"
50558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50565 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
50572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50581 arg "float-insert table"
50589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50596 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
50603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50642 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
50650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50672 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
50680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50718 \begin_inset space ~
50727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50736 arg "nomencl-insert"
50744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50752 \begin_inset space ~
50761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50770 arg "footnote-insert"
50778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50800 arg "marginalnote-insert"
50808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50816 \begin_inset space ~
50825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50849 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
50851 \begin_inset space ~
50860 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50869 arg "box-insert Frameless"
50877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50890 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50945 \begin_inset space ~
50954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50963 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
50971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
50978 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
50985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50994 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
51002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
51009 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51011 \begin_inset space ~
51020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51029 arg "dialog-show character"
51037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51043 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51045 \begin_inset space ~
51048 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
51055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51061 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
51066 arg "textstyle-apply"
51074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51079 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
51080 Format text using the recent settings in the
51083 arg "dialog-show character"
51092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51101 arg "layout-paragraph"
51109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51115 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51117 \begin_inset space ~
51126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51135 arg "thesaurus-entry"
51143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51149 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51163 \begin_layout Subsection
51164 View/Update Toolbar
51165 \begin_inset Index idx
51170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51189 \begin_layout Standard
51190 \begin_inset Graphics
51191 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
51198 \begin_layout Standard
51199 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51205 \begin_layout Standard
51206 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
51210 \begin_layout Standard
51211 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51217 \begin_layout Standard
51218 \begin_inset Tabular
51219 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
51220 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51221 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51222 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51246 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51262 arg "buffer-update"
51270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51276 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51292 arg "master-buffer-view"
51300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51308 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
51310 \begin_inset space ~
51316 \begin_inset space ~
51325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51334 arg "master-buffer-update"
51342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51350 \begin_inset space ~
51354 \begin_inset space ~
51363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51372 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
51380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51389 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
51391 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
51394 \SpecialChar menuseparator
51395 Synchronize with Output
51401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51412 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
51422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51429 View (Other Formats)
51435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51442 arg "update-others"
51446 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
51454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51461 Update (Other Formats)
51474 \begin_layout Standard
51476 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
51477 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
51483 \begin_layout Subsection
51487 \begin_layout Standard
51488 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
51489 \begin_inset space ~
51493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51495 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51499 , the table toolbar
51500 \begin_inset Index idx
51505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51507 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51524 \begin_inset space ~
51529 manual and the math macro toolbar
51530 \begin_inset Index idx
51535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51537 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51558 \begin_layout Chapter
51559 The Document Settings
51560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51562 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51567 \begin_inset Index idx
51572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51574 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51591 \begin_layout Standard
51595 \begin_inset space ~
51600 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
51601 is called with the menu
51603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51607 You can save your document settings as default with the
51609 Save as Document Defaults
51611 button in any dialog.
51612 This will create a template named
51616 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
51617 when you create a new document without
51621 \begin_layout Standard
51626 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
51627 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
51630 \begin_layout Standard
51631 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
51632 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
51633 to find the one you are looking for.
51634 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
51635 the submenus of the dialog.
51637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51641 \begin_inset space \space{}
51645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51652 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
51653 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
51654 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
51657 \begin_layout Section
51661 \begin_layout Standard
51662 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
51664 Document classes are described in section
51665 \begin_inset space ~
51669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51671 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
51678 \begin_layout Standard
51682 \begin_inset space ~
51687 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
51692 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
51693 as a layout for a document class.
51694 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
51696 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
51705 \begin_layout Standard
51706 Some classes use special class options by default.
51707 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
51711 and you can decide to use them or not.
51712 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
51713 recommended you leave them untouched.
51718 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51719 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
51724 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51726 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
51731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51732 When you want to use one of the following drivers
51733 \begin_inset Newline newline
51738 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
51741 \begin_inset Newline newline
51744 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51745 distribution, see section
51750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51752 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
51765 \begin_layout Standard
51770 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
51771 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
51772 in the background if the child document
51773 is opened without its master.
51774 This way child documents are always compilable.
51775 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
51782 \begin_inset space ~
51790 \begin_layout Standard
51791 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51802 \begin_inset Index idx
51807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51825 \begin_inset Index idx
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51847 for cross-references, see section
51848 \begin_inset space ~
51852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51854 reference "sec:Cross-References"
51861 \begin_layout Section
51865 \begin_layout Standard
51866 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
51867 Please refer to the section
51870 \begin_inset space ~
51878 \begin_inset space ~
51883 manual for details.
51886 \begin_layout Section
51890 \begin_layout Standard
51891 Modules are explained in section
51892 \begin_inset space ~
51896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51898 reference "subsec:Modules"
51905 \begin_layout Section
51909 \begin_layout Standard
51911 \begin_inset space ~
51915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51917 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
51924 \begin_layout Section
51928 \begin_layout Standard
51929 The document font settings are described in section
51930 \begin_inset space ~
51934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51936 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
51943 \begin_layout Section
51947 \begin_layout Standard
51948 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
51960 \begin_inset space ~
51965 and whether it should be a
51968 \begin_inset space ~
51973 can also be specified here.
51976 \begin_layout Standard
51977 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
51978 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
51979 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
51981 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
51984 \begin_layout Standard
51987 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
51990 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
51991 justifies the text on screen.
51992 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
51994 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
51998 \begin_layout Standard
52000 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
52009 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
52014 \begin_layout Section
52018 \begin_layout Standard
52019 This dialog is described in sections
52020 \begin_inset space ~
52024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52026 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
52031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52033 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
52040 \begin_layout Section
52044 \begin_layout Standard
52045 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
52046 \begin_inset space ~
52050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52052 reference "subsec:Margins"
52059 \begin_layout Section
52061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52063 name "sec:Language-encodings"
52068 \begin_inset Index idx
52073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52075 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52092 \begin_layout Standard
52093 The document language and quote styles are set here.
52094 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52095 (the \SpecialChar LyX
52097 is always encoded in utf8).
52098 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
52099 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
52100 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
52101 -command is not known for
52102 a particular character).
52103 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
52107 \begin_layout Standard
52109 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
52110 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
52111 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
52112 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
52113 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
52114 's default encoding).
52115 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
52116 's Unicode support covers the
52117 characters of most scripts.
52118 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
52119 using one of the traditional, or
52120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52127 , encodings is necessary.
52130 \begin_layout Standard
52132 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
52134 provides support for these traditional encodings.
52137 Traditional (auto-selected)
52143 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
52144 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
52145 the given language(s).
52147 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
52151 \begin_layout Standard
52153 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
52154 If you use the option
52159 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
52162 If the document contains text in more than one language you
52163 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
52166 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52169 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
52170 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
52171 exactly one encoding.
52172 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
52177 \begin_layout Standard
52179 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
52180 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
52186 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
52187 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
52189 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
52193 \begin_layout Standard
52195 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
52196 Finally, you can also select
52200 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
52201 Note that this encoding is then used for
52206 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
52207 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
52211 \begin_layout Standard
52213 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52215 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
52219 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
52220 Do not load inputenc
52221 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52225 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
52227 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
52229 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52231 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
52232 in the next dropdown menu
52233 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52234 does what it states:
52235 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
52237 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
52239 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
52240 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
52241 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52247 \begin_inset Index idx
52252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52254 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
52259 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52264 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
52278 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
52279 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
52280 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
52281 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
52282 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
52284 Note that this option is only available for the standard
52290 Traditional (auto-selected)
52297 \begin_layout Standard
52299 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
52301 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
52302 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
52303 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
52304 installation supports Unicode), choose
52305 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
52306 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
52307 is quite incomplete, so
52308 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
52313 (when \SpecialChar LyX
52314 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
52315 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
52316 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
52317 -commands is not used, because all
52318 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
52319 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52320 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52321 , two new alternative engines
52322 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
52324 Both engines support Unicode natively.
52326 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
52329 \begin_inset space ~
52337 \begin_inset space ~
52345 \begin_inset space ~
52351 \begin_inset space ~
52355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52357 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
52362 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
52366 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
52371 \begin_layout Standard
52375 \begin_inset space ~
52380 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52381 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
52383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52391 The possible settings are:
52394 \begin_layout Description
52395 Default uses the language package that is selected in
52397 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52398 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
52402 \begin_inset space ~
52406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52408 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52415 \begin_layout Description
52416 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
52417 format you will use.
52418 In many cases this will be
52423 \begin_inset Index idx
52428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52431 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52446 If the newer package
52451 \begin_inset Index idx
52456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52473 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52474 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52475 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
52477 this package will be used instead of
52484 \begin_layout Description
52486 \begin_inset space ~
52497 would be more appropriate.
52500 \begin_layout Description
52501 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
52502 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
52506 (for German texts), type in
52509 \begin_inset Newline newline
52514 usepackage{ngerman}
52517 \begin_layout Description
52518 None will not use a language package.
52519 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
52522 \begin_layout Standard
52523 Here is a list with the important encodings:
52526 \begin_layout Description
52528 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
52530 \begin_inset space ~
52534 \begin_inset space ~
52538 \begin_inset space ~
52545 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52551 \begin_inset Index idx
52556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52574 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
52575 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
52576 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
52582 \begin_layout Description
52583 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
52585 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
52586 commands, which may result in a big
52587 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
52588 -commands are needed.
52590 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
52591 This is the same as the
52604 \begin_layout Description
52606 \begin_inset space ~
52610 \begin_inset space ~
52613 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
52616 \begin_layout Description
52618 \begin_inset space ~
52622 \begin_inset space ~
52625 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
52628 \begin_layout Description
52630 \begin_inset space ~
52633 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
52636 \begin_layout Description
52638 \begin_inset space ~
52642 \begin_inset space ~
52645 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
52646 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
52649 \begin_layout Description
52651 \begin_inset space ~
52655 \begin_inset space ~
52658 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
52662 \begin_layout Description
52664 \begin_inset space ~
52668 \begin_inset space ~
52671 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
52672 ISO-8859-13 encoding
52675 \begin_layout Description
52677 \begin_inset space ~
52681 \begin_inset space ~
52685 \begin_inset space ~
52688 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
52689 \begin_inset space ~
52695 \begin_layout Description
52697 \begin_inset space ~
52701 \begin_inset space ~
52705 \begin_inset space ~
52708 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
52709 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
52712 \begin_layout Description
52714 \begin_inset space ~
52718 \begin_inset space ~
52721 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
52722 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
52723 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52724 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
52725 \begin_inset space ~
52729 \begin_inset space ~
52735 \begin_layout Description
52737 \begin_inset space ~
52741 \begin_inset space ~
52744 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
52745 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
52746 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52748 should try to use the encoding Unicode
52749 \begin_inset space ~
52753 \begin_inset space ~
52759 \begin_layout Description
52761 \begin_inset space ~
52765 \begin_inset space ~
52768 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
52771 \begin_layout Description
52773 \begin_inset space ~
52777 \begin_inset space ~
52780 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
52783 \begin_layout Description
52785 \begin_inset space ~
52789 \begin_inset space ~
52792 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
52795 \begin_layout Description
52797 \begin_inset space ~
52800 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
52803 \begin_layout Description
52805 \begin_inset space ~
52808 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
52811 \begin_layout Description
52813 \begin_inset space ~
52817 \begin_inset space ~
52820 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
52823 \begin_layout Description
52825 \begin_inset space ~
52829 \begin_inset space ~
52835 \begin_layout Description
52837 \begin_inset space ~
52841 \begin_inset space ~
52844 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
52847 \begin_layout Description
52849 \begin_inset space ~
52853 \begin_inset space ~
52859 \begin_layout Description
52861 \begin_inset space ~
52865 \begin_inset space ~
52868 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52874 \begin_inset Index idx
52879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52882 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52896 , when using this, set the document language to
52901 \begin_layout Description
52903 \begin_inset space ~
52907 \begin_inset space ~
52910 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52915 , when using this, set the document language to
52918 \begin_inset space ~
52924 \begin_layout Description
52926 \begin_inset space ~
52930 \begin_inset space ~
52933 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52939 \begin_inset Index idx
52944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52961 , when using this, set the document language to
52966 \begin_layout Description
52968 \begin_inset space ~
52972 \begin_inset space ~
52975 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52980 , when using this, set the document language to
52985 \begin_layout Description
52987 \begin_inset space ~
52991 \begin_inset space ~
52994 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52999 , when using this, set the document language to
53004 \begin_layout Description
53006 \begin_inset space ~
53009 (EUC-KR) for Korean
53012 \begin_layout Description
53014 \begin_inset space ~
53018 \begin_inset space ~
53022 \begin_inset space ~
53025 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
53028 \begin_layout Description
53030 \begin_inset space ~
53034 \begin_inset space ~
53038 \begin_inset space ~
53041 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
53042 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
53043 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
53046 \begin_layout Description
53048 \begin_inset space ~
53052 \begin_inset space ~
53058 \begin_layout Description
53060 \begin_inset space ~
53064 \begin_inset space ~
53067 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
53068 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
53071 \begin_layout Description
53073 \begin_inset space ~
53077 \begin_inset space ~
53080 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53086 \begin_inset Index idx
53091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53094 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53108 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
53109 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
53111 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
53112 with the default encoding (
53114 Unicode (utf8) [default]
53120 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
53121 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
53126 \begin_layout Description
53128 \begin_inset space ~
53136 \begin_inset space ~
53139 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
53146 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
53149 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53156 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
53157 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
53159 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
53162 \begin_layout Description
53164 \begin_inset space ~
53168 \begin_inset space ~
53171 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53177 \begin_inset Index idx
53182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53200 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
53203 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
53205 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
53206 This used to be more comprehensive than
53209 \begin_inset space ~
53214 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
53219 \begin_layout Description
53221 \begin_inset space ~
53224 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53230 \begin_inset Index idx
53235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53238 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53254 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
53255 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
53257 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
53258 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
53259 with the default encoding (
53261 Unicode (utf8) [default]
53267 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
53268 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
53273 \begin_layout Description
53275 \begin_inset space ~
53279 \begin_inset space ~
53283 \begin_inset space ~
53286 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
53287 \begin_inset space ~
53293 \begin_layout Description
53295 \begin_inset space ~
53299 \begin_inset space ~
53303 \begin_inset space ~
53306 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
53307 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
53308 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
53312 \begin_layout Description
53314 \begin_inset space ~
53318 \begin_inset space ~
53322 \begin_inset space ~
53325 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
53326 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
53329 \begin_layout Section
53331 \begin_inset Index idx
53336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53353 \begin_inset Index idx
53358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53360 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53375 \begin_inset Index idx
53380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53382 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53397 \begin_inset Index idx
53402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53421 \begin_layout Standard
53422 Here you can alter the font color for the
53426 (default: black), for
53429 \begin_inset space ~
53434 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
53438 (default: white) and for
53441 \begin_inset space ~
53451 sets the color back to the default.
53454 \begin_layout Standard
53455 Clicking any button showing
53463 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
53464 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
53465 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
53466 later more quickly.
53469 \begin_layout Standard
53470 Note, if you change the
53473 \begin_inset space ~
53478 font color and use the option
53481 \begin_inset space ~
53486 in the document settings under
53489 \begin_inset space ~
53494 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
53495 \begin_inset space ~
53499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53501 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
53508 \begin_layout Standard
53509 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
53515 \begin_layout Standard
53519 \begin_inset space ~
53528 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
53531 \begin_inset space ~
53534 Code after a forced page break:
53537 \begin_layout Itemize
53538 For the page color:
53539 \begin_inset Newline newline
53546 pagecolor{color name}
53549 \begin_layout Itemize
53550 For the text color:
53551 \begin_inset Newline newline
53561 \begin_layout Standard
53562 You are restricted to one of
53598 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
53605 \begin_inset space ~
53611 \begin_inset Newline newline
53614 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
53615 names to refer to them:
53618 \begin_layout Itemize
53624 \begin_inset Newline newline
53629 page_backgroundcolor
53632 \begin_layout Itemize
53636 \begin_inset space ~
53642 \begin_inset Newline newline
53650 \begin_layout Itemize
53654 \begin_inset space ~
53660 \begin_inset Newline newline
53668 \begin_layout Itemize
53672 \begin_inset space ~
53678 \begin_inset Newline newline
53686 \begin_layout Standard
53687 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
53690 \begin_inset space ~
53698 \begin_inset space ~
53706 \begin_layout Section
53708 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
53712 \begin_layout Standard
53714 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
53715 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
53716 \begin_inset space ~
53720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53722 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
53730 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
53731 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
53734 \begin_layout Standard
53736 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
53737 Additionally, you can advise
53738 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
53741 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
53743 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
53744 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
53745 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
53748 \begin_layout Section
53752 \begin_layout Standard
53753 Here you can adjust the
53757 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
53761 as described in section
53762 \begin_inset space ~
53766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53768 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
53773 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
53777 \begin_layout Standard
53779 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
53780 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
53782 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
53783 this package can be used as well.
53784 The most common one are:
53787 \begin_layout Description
53789 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
53790 right Line numbers to the right margin
53793 \begin_layout Description
53795 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
53796 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
53800 \begin_layout Description
53802 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
53803 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
53806 \begin_layout Description
53808 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
53809 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
53812 \begin_layout Description
53814 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
53815 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
53818 \begin_layout Description
53820 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
53822 \begin_inset space ~
53825 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
53830 \begin_layout Section
53834 \begin_layout Standard
53835 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53841 \begin_inset Index idx
53846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53868 \begin_inset Index idx
53873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53876 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53895 \begin_inset Index idx
53900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53903 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53918 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53921 Sectioned bibliography
53923 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53929 \begin_inset Index idx
53934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53956 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
53957 Finally, you can select a document-specific
53961 for the generation of the bibliography.
53962 For a further description of these possibilities see section
53963 \begin_inset space ~
53967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53969 reference "sec:Bibliography"
53976 \begin_layout Section
53980 \begin_layout Standard
53981 Here you can define the
53985 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
53987 \begin_inset space ~
53991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53993 reference "sec:Index"
54000 \begin_layout Section
54004 \begin_layout Standard
54005 The PDF properties are explained in section
54006 \begin_inset space ~
54010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54012 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
54019 \begin_layout Section
54023 \begin_layout Standard
54024 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
54025 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54031 \begin_inset Index idx
54036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54039 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54058 \begin_inset Index idx
54063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54085 \begin_inset Index idx
54090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54093 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54112 \begin_inset Index idx
54117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54139 \begin_inset Index idx
54144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54147 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54166 \begin_inset Index idx
54171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54174 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54193 \begin_inset Index idx
54198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54201 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54220 \begin_inset Index idx
54225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54228 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54247 \begin_inset Index idx
54252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54255 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54274 \begin_inset Index idx
54279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54296 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
54299 \begin_layout Description
54300 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
54301 -errors in formulas,
54302 ensure that you have this enabled.
54305 \begin_layout Description
54306 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
54307 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
54308 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
54312 \begin_layout Description
54313 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
54316 \begin_inset space ~
54328 \begin_layout Description
54329 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
54332 \begin_inset space ~
54344 \begin_layout Description
54345 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
54356 \begin_layout Description
54357 mathtools is used for the math commands
54393 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
54400 \begin_layout Description
54401 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
54403 Chemical Symbols and Equations
54412 \begin_layout Description
54413 stackrel is used for the math command
54430 \begin_layout Description
54431 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
54434 \begin_layout Description
54435 undertilde is used for the math command
54443 Accents for one Character
54452 \begin_layout Section
54454 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
54456 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
54462 \begin_layout Standard
54464 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
54465 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
54468 \begin_layout Standard
54470 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
54471 The float placement options
54472 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
54475 are described in the section
54478 \begin_inset space ~
54482 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
54484 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
54492 \begin_inset space ~
54500 \begin_layout Section
54504 \begin_layout Standard
54505 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
54507 Program Code Listings
54512 \begin_inset space ~
54520 \begin_layout Section
54524 \begin_layout Standard
54525 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
54533 set to be used and set the
54538 The itemize environment is described in section
54539 \begin_inset space ~
54543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54545 reference "sec:Itemize"
54552 \begin_layout Standard
54553 You can furthermore specify a
54556 \begin_inset space ~
54561 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54562 command of the desired character.
54563 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
54570 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
54572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54576 \begin_inset space \space{}
54580 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
54590 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
54591 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
54594 \begin_layout Standard
54595 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54603 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
54604 -packages in the preamble (menu
54607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54611 \begin_inset space ~
54617 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
54621 usepackage{textcomp}
54624 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
54628 usepackage{amssymb}
54638 \begin_layout Section
54642 \begin_layout Standard
54643 Branches are described in section
54644 \begin_inset space ~
54648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54650 reference "sec:Branches"
54657 \begin_layout Section
54659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54661 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
54668 \begin_layout Standard
54669 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
54672 \begin_layout Description
54674 \begin_inset space ~
54678 \begin_inset space ~
54681 Format: The format that is used when you enter
54682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54701 View Master Document
54702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54709 Update Master Document
54710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54717 menu or the toolbar.
54718 The default is set in
54720 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54721 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
54723 \begin_inset space ~
54726 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
54730 \begin_inset space ~
54734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54736 reference "sec:File-Formats"
54743 \begin_layout Description
54745 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
54747 \begin_inset space ~
54751 \begin_inset space ~
54755 \begin_inset space ~
54758 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
54763 option which is needed with some packages.
54764 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
54765 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
54768 \begin_layout Description
54770 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
54772 \begin_inset space ~
54776 \begin_inset space ~
54779 Options offers settings for the
54787 \begin_layout Itemize
54791 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
54793 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
54795 \begin_inset space ~
54801 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
54803 \begin_inset space ~
54807 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
54813 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
54815 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
54816 settings for the menu
54818 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
54822 \begin_inset space ~
54826 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
54829 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
54830 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
54835 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
54837 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
54839 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
54842 or a detailed description see section
54844 Reverse DVI/PDF search
54849 \begin_inset space ~
54855 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
54859 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
54863 \begin_layout Itemize
54865 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
54868 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
54870 determines whether so-called
54871 \begin_inset Quotes els
54875 \begin_inset Quotes ers
54879 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
54881 \begin_inset Quotes els
54885 \begin_inset Quotes ers
54888 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
54889 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
54890 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
54892 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
54894 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
54895 macros, you can uncheck this.
54896 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
54903 \begin_layout Description
54905 \begin_inset space ~
54909 \begin_inset space ~
54912 Options offers settings for the export format
54920 \begin_inset space ~
54925 will assure that the output follows exactly version
54926 \begin_inset space ~
54929 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
54933 \begin_inset space ~
54938 settings are described in detail in section
54940 Math Output in XHTML
54945 \begin_inset space ~
54954 \begin_inset space ~
54958 \begin_inset space ~
54963 is used for the size of equations in the output.
54966 \begin_layout Description
54968 \begin_inset space ~
54973 Save transient properties
54975 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
54976 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
54977 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
54981 \begin_layout Itemize
54982 the activation of change tracking
54985 \begin_layout Itemize
54986 the output of tracked changes
54989 \begin_layout Itemize
54990 the recording of the document directory path.
54993 \begin_layout Standard
54994 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
54995 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
54999 \begin_layout Section
55007 \begin_layout Standard
55008 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
55010 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
55012 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55014 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
55018 \begin_layout Standard
55019 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55020 -syntax is given in section
55021 \begin_inset space ~
55025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55027 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
55034 \begin_layout Chapter
55040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55042 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
55047 \begin_inset Index idx
55052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55061 \begin_layout Standard
55062 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
55064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
55068 It has the following submenus.
55071 \begin_layout Section
55075 \begin_layout Subsection
55079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55080 User Interface File
55081 \begin_inset Index idx
55086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55088 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55103 \begin_inset Index idx
55108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55110 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55127 \begin_layout Standard
55128 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
55129 interface (ui) file.
55130 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
55138 \begin_layout Description
55143 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
55146 \begin_layout Description
55153 the menu entries in popup context menus
55156 \begin_layout Description
55161 specifies the toolbar buttons
55164 \begin_layout Standard
55165 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
55166 and edit the entries.
55169 \begin_layout Standard
55170 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
55182 entries must be finished with an explicit
55207 and in the case of the
55208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55220 The syntax for the entries is:
55223 \begin_layout Standard
55224 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55253 \begin_layout Standard
55255 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55258 All the \SpecialChar LyX
55259 -functions are listed in the menu
55261 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
55263 \begin_inset space ~
55271 \begin_layout Standard
55272 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
55278 \begin_layout Standard
55279 For example, assuming you use the menu
55281 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
55284 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
55288 \begin_layout Standard
55289 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55313 \begin_layout Standard
55315 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
55319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55330 to have the sixth bookmark.
55333 \begin_layout Standard
55337 \begin_inset space ~
55342 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
55343 's toolbar buttons.
55344 The currently available icon sets are compared in
55345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55348 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
55356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55360 \begin_layout Standard
55363 Enable tool tips in main work area
55365 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
55369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55373 \begin_layout Standard
55378 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
55379 should display in the menu
55381 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55383 \begin_inset space ~
55391 \begin_layout Subsection
55395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55399 \begin_layout Standard
55402 Restore window layouts and geometries
55405 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
55406 the last \SpecialChar LyX
55410 \begin_layout Standard
55413 Restore cursor positions
55415 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
55419 \begin_layout Standard
55422 Load opened files from last session
55424 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
55428 \begin_layout Standard
55431 Clear all session information
55433 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
55434 sessions (cursor positions, names
55435 of last opened documents, etc.).
55438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55442 name "subsec:Backup documents"
55447 \begin_inset Index idx
55452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55471 \begin_layout Standard
55474 Backup original documents when saving
55476 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
55477 it was saved the last time.
55478 It is stored in the
55481 \begin_inset space ~
55487 \begin_inset space ~
55491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55493 reference "sec:Paths"
55497 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
55500 \begin_inset space ~
55506 The backup file has the file extension
55507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55521 \begin_layout Standard
55524 Backup documents, every
55526 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
55529 \begin_layout Standard
55532 Save documents compressed by default
55534 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
55535 \begin_inset space ~
55539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55541 reference "subsec:Compressed"
55546 This applies to newly created documents only.
55547 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
55550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55551 Windows & work area
55554 \begin_layout Standard
55557 Open documents in tabs
55559 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
55563 \begin_layout Standard
55568 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
55573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55575 \begin_inset space ~
55579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55581 reference "sec:Paths"
55585 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
55592 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
55593 documents will be opened in the same running instance
55594 of \SpecialChar LyX
55596 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
55597 instance is created for each file.
55600 \begin_layout Standard
55603 Single close-tab button
55605 is checked, there will only be one close button (
55615 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
55616 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
55617 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
55621 \begin_layout Standard
55622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
55625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55630 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
55631 before the change takes effect.
55639 \begin_layout Standard
55644 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
55646 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
55648 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
55652 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
55653 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
55654 and only want to close the view in once instance.
55657 \begin_layout Subsection
55659 \begin_inset Index idx
55664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55666 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55683 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
55690 \begin_layout Standard
55691 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
55695 \begin_layout Standard
55696 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
55699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55704 This section only deals with the fonts
55708 the \SpecialChar LyX
55710 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
55713 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
55714 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
55725 \begin_layout Standard
55726 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
55743 (depends on the system) as its
55746 \begin_inset space ~
55762 \begin_layout Standard
55763 You can change the font size with the
55770 \begin_layout Standard
55775 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
55777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55780 points have the size of 1
55781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55785 \begin_inset space ~
55789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55791 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
55796 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
55797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55801 The sizes are explained in detail in section
55802 \begin_inset space ~
55806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55808 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
55815 \begin_layout Subsection
55817 \begin_inset Index idx
55822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55840 \begin_inset Index idx
55845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55847 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55864 \begin_layout Standard
55865 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
55866 by choosing an item in the
55867 list and selecting the
55874 \begin_layout Standard
55875 By checking the option
55879 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
55882 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
55883 \begin_inset space ~
55887 \begin_inset space ~
55892 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
55895 \begin_layout Subsection
55897 \begin_inset Index idx
55902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55904 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55921 \begin_layout Standard
55922 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
55926 \begin_layout Standard
55931 enables previewing snippets of your document.
55932 This feature is described in section
55933 \begin_inset space ~
55937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55939 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
55946 \begin_layout Standard
55947 Checking the option
55950 \begin_inset space ~
55954 \begin_inset space ~
55958 \begin_inset space ~
55963 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
55966 \begin_layout Section
55968 \begin_inset Index idx
55973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55975 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55992 \begin_layout Subsection
55996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56000 \begin_layout Standard
56003 Cursor follows scrollbar
56005 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
56009 \begin_layout Standard
56010 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
56011 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
56012 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
56015 \begin_layout Standard
56018 Scroll below end of document
56020 is self-explanatory.
56023 \begin_layout Standard
56024 In \SpecialChar LyX
56025 one can jump from word to word by pressing
56032 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
56034 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
56035 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
56036 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
56040 \begin_layout Standard
56042 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
56045 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
56047 is only relevant in documents that
56052 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
56061 markup) with this option selected.
56062 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
56064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56068 \begin_inset Quotes els
56072 \begin_inset Quotes ers
56076 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
56077 dissolving from insets.
56082 track changes, pasted text is
56087 \begin_inset Quotes els
56091 \begin_inset Quotes ers
56094 notwithstanding the state of this option.
56099 \begin_layout Standard
56102 Sort environments alphabetically
56104 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
56107 \begin_layout Standard
56110 Group environments by their category
56112 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
56115 \begin_layout Standard
56120 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
56129 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
56133 \begin_layout Standard
56135 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
56138 Search drive for cited files
56140 allows \SpecialChar LyX
56141 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
56144 \begin_inset space ~
56148 \begin_inset space ~
56152 \begin_inset space ~
56156 \begin_inset space ~
56159 Content\SpecialChar ldots
56162 context menu on a citation.
56166 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
56168 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
56171 field determines the search pattern.
56173 \begin_inset space ~
56177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56179 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
56188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56192 \begin_layout Standard
56193 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
56198 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
56199 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
56203 \begin_layout Subsection
56205 \begin_inset Index idx
56210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56217 \begin_inset Index idx
56222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56224 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56241 \begin_layout Standard
56246 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
56248 Several binding files are available, among them:
56251 \begin_layout Description
56252 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
56255 \begin_layout Description
56256 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
56268 \begin_layout Description
56269 mac.bind a set of bindings for
56272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56280 \begin_layout Standard
56281 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
56286 , and binding files for special languages.
56287 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
56288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56292 \begin_inset space \space{}
56296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56304 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
56305 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
56306 will try to use the appropriate binding
56310 \begin_layout Standard
56311 Some binding files, like
56315 , only have a limited scope.
56316 When looking at the end of the file
56320 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
56323 \begin_layout Standard
56327 \begin_inset space ~
56331 \begin_inset space ~
56336 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
56337 in the selected key binding file.
56340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56344 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
56349 \begin_inset Index idx
56354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56356 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56373 \begin_layout Standard
56374 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
56375 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
56376 functions and the bound shortcuts.
56377 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
56380 Show key-bindings containing
56383 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
56384 Insert there for example as keyword
56385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56392 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
56393 functions that contain
56394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56402 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
56403 All \SpecialChar LyX
56404 functions are also listed in the file
56409 that you will find in the
56416 \begin_layout Standard
56417 For example, to add the shortcut
56425 , select the function and press the
56430 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
56431 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
56434 \begin_layout Standard
56435 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
56436 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
56441 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
56443 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
56448 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
56451 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
56455 \begin_layout Standard
56456 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
56459 \begin_layout Standard
56460 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
56462 The syntax of the entries is:
56465 \begin_layout Standard
56471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56490 \begin_layout Standard
56491 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
56492 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
56493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56520 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
56521 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
56522 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
56523 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
56525 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
56529 , you needed to specify it as
56534 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
56537 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
56540 \begin_layout Subsection
56542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56544 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
56549 \begin_inset Index idx
56554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56561 \begin_inset Index idx
56566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56568 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56585 \begin_layout Standard
56586 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
56587 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
56588 provides keyboard maps.
56589 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
56590 is a Romanian one, you can enable
56593 \begin_inset space ~
56597 \begin_inset space ~
56602 and select the keyboard map file named
56609 \begin_layout Standard
56618 keyboard map and, if you use the
56622 bindings, you can select the first and second with
56625 arg "keymap-primary"
56631 arg "keymap-secondary"
56634 respectively or toggle between them with
56637 arg "keymap-toggle"
56643 \begin_layout Standard
56644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56652 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
56661 \begin_layout Standard
56662 You can also specify the mouse
56664 Wheel scrolling speed
56667 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
56671 Middle mouse button pasting
56673 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
56674 inserts the content of the clipboard.
56677 \begin_layout Standard
56685 \begin_inset space ~
56689 \begin_inset space ~
56694 you can select a key for zooming.
56695 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
56698 \begin_layout Subsection
56702 \begin_layout Standard
56703 Input completion is described in section
56704 \begin_inset space ~
56708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56710 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
56717 \begin_layout Section
56719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56726 \begin_inset Index idx
56731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56738 \begin_inset Index idx
56743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56745 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56762 \begin_layout Standard
56763 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
56764 are normally determined during
56766 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
56769 \begin_layout Description
56771 \begin_inset space ~
56774 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
56775 's working directory.
56776 It is the default when you
56787 \begin_inset space ~
56795 \begin_layout Description
56797 \begin_inset space ~
56800 templates This directory
56801 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
56802 contains the templates that are shown
56803 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
56804 will be opened when you use the menu
56805 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
56810 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
56812 \begin_inset space ~
56816 \begin_inset space ~
56824 \begin_layout Description
56826 \begin_inset space ~
56829 files This directory
56830 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
56831 will be opened when you use the
56832 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
56833 contains the example files that are listed in
56836 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
56845 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
56847 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
56849 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
56855 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
56857 \begin_inset Newline newline
56861 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56873 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
56874 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
56884 \begin_layout Description
56886 \begin_inset space ~
56890 \begin_inset Index idx
56895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56897 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56911 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
56912 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
56913 \begin_inset space ~
56917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56919 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
56927 will be used to save the backups.
56928 \begin_inset Newline newline
56931 Backup files have the ending
56932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56942 \begin_layout Description
56944 \begin_inset space ~
56947 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
56948 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
56950 \begin_inset Newline newline
56957 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56963 You can edit this file with the program
56972 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
56973 in its preferences under
56976 \begin_inset space ~
56982 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
56987 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
56989 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
56990 in your \SpecialChar LyX
56996 and \SpecialChar LyX
56997 need to be running the same time.
56998 \begin_inset Newline newline
57001 The pipe is also used for the
57005 feature, see section
57006 \begin_inset space ~
57010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57012 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
57017 \begin_inset Newline newline
57020 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
57021 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
57022 \begin_inset Newline newline
57038 \begin_layout Description
57040 \begin_inset space ~
57043 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
57046 \begin_layout Description
57048 \begin_inset space ~
57051 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
57052 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
57053 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
57056 \begin_layout Description
57058 \begin_inset space ~
57061 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
57067 You only need to specify it if you are using
57071 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
57073 For \SpecialChar LyX
57078 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
57082 \begin_layout Description
57084 \begin_inset space ~
57087 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
57088 When \SpecialChar LyX
57089 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
57090 to find it on the system.
57091 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
57093 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
57095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57102 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
57103 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
57106 \begin_layout Description
57108 \begin_inset space ~
57111 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
57112 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
57113 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
57114 code or in the document
57116 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
57118 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
57119 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
57120 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
57121 scanned for the input files.
57122 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
57123 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
57125 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
57126 compilation may fail for some documents.
57129 \begin_layout Section
57133 \begin_layout Standard
57134 Here you can insert your
57143 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
57145 \begin_inset space ~
57149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57151 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
57155 , to mark changes you make as yours.
57158 \begin_layout Section
57160 \begin_inset Index idx
57165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57167 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57182 \begin_inset Index idx
57187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57189 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57206 \begin_layout Subsection
57208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57210 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
57217 \begin_layout Description
57219 \begin_inset space ~
57223 \begin_inset space ~
57226 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
57228 You can find its actual translation status here:
57229 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57231 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
57237 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
57241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57243 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
57244 LaTeX Language Support
57249 \begin_layout Description
57251 \begin_inset space ~
57254 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
57255 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
57256 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
57257 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
57258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57274 The most widespread language package is
57279 \begin_inset Index idx
57284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57301 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
57303 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
57304 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
57305 come with the alternative
57311 \begin_inset Index idx
57316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57333 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
57334 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
57340 The available selections are described in section
57341 \begin_inset space ~
57345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57347 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
57354 \begin_layout Description
57356 \begin_inset space ~
57360 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
57361 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57362 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
57364 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
57368 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
57372 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
57374 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
57378 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
57379 that is used to switch to a different language
57380 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
57381 to start the package
57385 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
57386 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
57390 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
57391 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
57394 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
57398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
57406 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
57414 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
57417 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
57419 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
57423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
57441 selectlanguage{$$lang}
57442 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
57449 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
57450 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
57460 , this setting is ignored.
57465 \begin_layout Description
57467 \begin_inset space ~
57471 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
57478 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
57479 Use this if the language switch set in
57483 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
57487 's alternative command
57491 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
57492 \SpecialChar allowbreak
57495 end{otherlanguage*}
57499 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
57500 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
57501 command toggles the package on and off
57502 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
57503 Empty by default, as
57507 selectlanguage{$$lang}
57509 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
57514 selectlanguage{$$lang}
57520 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
57525 , this setting is ignored.
57530 \begin_layout Description
57532 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
57534 \begin_inset space ~
57538 \begin_inset space ~
57541 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
57545 \begin_layout Description
57547 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
57549 \begin_inset space ~
57553 \begin_inset space ~
57556 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
57562 \begin_layout Description
57564 \begin_inset space ~
57568 \begin_inset space ~
57572 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
57574 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
57577 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
57578 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
57581 to the document class options
57582 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
57583 rather than the language package options.
57584 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
57588 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
57589 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
57591 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
57592 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
57594 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
57599 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
57600 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
57609 \begin_layout Description
57611 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
57613 \begin_inset space ~
57617 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
57619 \begin_inset space ~
57623 \begin_inset space ~
57627 \begin_inset space ~
57633 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
57635 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
57638 this option is set,
57639 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
57640 the language switch defined in
57643 \begin_inset space ~
57648 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
57649 to the document language.
57650 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
57651 This might be needed if you use a non-default
57654 \begin_inset space ~
57659 or if a package resets the document language.
57660 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
57661 usually should be the document language).
57662 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
57663 documents start with the chosen document language.
57664 When this option is not set, the
57667 \begin_inset space ~
57672 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57674 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
57677 \begin_inset space ~
57687 \begin_layout Description
57689 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
57691 \begin_inset space ~
57695 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
57697 \begin_inset space ~
57701 \begin_inset space ~
57705 \begin_inset space ~
57711 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
57715 \begin_inset space ~
57719 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
57720 Set document language explicitly
57726 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
57728 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
57734 \begin_inset space ~
57740 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
57742 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
57746 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
57748 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
57751 the end of the document.
57752 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
57756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57757 \paragraph_spacing single
57759 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
57765 \begin_layout Description
57767 \begin_inset space ~
57771 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
57773 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
57777 \begin_inset space ~
57781 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
57783 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
57785 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
57789 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
57792 in a language different
57793 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
57795 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
57798 the document language will be
57799 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
57800 marked (by default with a blue
57803 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
57805 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
57809 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
57813 \begin_layout Description
57815 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
57817 \begin_inset space ~
57821 \begin_inset space ~
57825 \begin_inset space ~
57828 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
57829 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
57830 switched via the operating system.
57831 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
57833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57836 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
57837 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
57842 \begin_layout Description
57844 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
57846 \begin_inset space ~
57850 \begin_inset space ~
57853 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
57854 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
57859 \begin_layout Description
57861 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
57863 \begin_inset space ~
57867 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
57869 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
57873 \begin_inset space ~
57877 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
57878 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
57879 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
57881 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
57885 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
57887 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
57888 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
57890 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
57891 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
57892 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
57894 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
57899 \begin_layout Standard
57904 means that the cursor
57905 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
57906 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
57907 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
57909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57912 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
57913 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
57917 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
57919 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
57920 specific case always means: move
57924 in text (even if this means:
57930 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
57931 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
57932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
57933 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
57934 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
57935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57946 \begin_layout Standard
57948 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
57953 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
57954 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
57955 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
57959 ) when coming from the left.
57960 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
57962 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
57963 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
57964 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
57969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57971 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
57975 \begin_layout Description
57977 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
57979 \begin_inset space ~
57983 \begin_inset space ~
57986 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
57987 separator alignment).
57988 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
57990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57993 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
57994 (static) custom character here.
57997 \begin_layout Description
57999 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
58001 \begin_inset space ~
58005 \begin_inset space ~
58008 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
58014 \begin_layout Subsection
58018 \begin_layout Standard
58019 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
58020 \begin_inset space ~
58024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58026 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
58033 \begin_layout Section
58037 \begin_layout Subsection
58039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58041 name "subsec:General-output"
58048 \begin_layout Description
58050 \begin_inset space ~
58053 search Commands that will be used for the menu
58055 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58057 \begin_inset space ~
58063 For a detailed description see section
58065 Reverse DVI/PDF search
58070 \begin_inset space ~
58078 \begin_layout Description
58080 \begin_inset space ~
58083 Options Options for the program
58087 that is used for the export format
58092 \begin_inset space ~
58096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58098 reference "subsec:Export"
58103 Possible options are listed in the
58108 \begin_inset Newline newline
58112 \begin_inset Flex URL
58115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58117 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
58127 \begin_layout Description
58129 \begin_inset space ~
58133 \begin_inset space ~
58136 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
58139 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58140 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
58142 \begin_inset space ~
58148 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
58151 \begin_layout Description
58153 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
58155 \begin_inset space ~
58159 \begin_inset Index idx
58164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58171 \begin_inset Index idx
58176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58178 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58192 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
58193 \begin_inset Newline newline
58197 \begin_inset Flex URL
58200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58202 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
58208 \begin_inset Newline newline
58211 For example the format
58212 \begin_inset Newline newline
58216 \begin_inset Newline newline
58219 prints the date as day/month/year.
58224 \begin_layout Description
58226 \begin_inset space ~
58230 \begin_inset space ~
58233 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
58234 is allowed to overwrite on export.
58237 \begin_layout Subsection
58243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58245 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
58250 \begin_inset Index idx
58255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58257 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58275 \begin_layout Description
58277 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
58279 \begin_inset space ~
58287 \begin_inset space ~
58291 \begin_inset space ~
58294 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
58299 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
58320 are used for Cyrillic.
58321 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
58322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58334 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
58336 sets up in the background.
58337 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
58342 \begin_layout Description
58344 \begin_inset space ~
58348 \begin_inset space ~
58352 \begin_inset space ~
58356 \begin_inset space ~
58359 options They only have an effect when the program
58363 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
58366 \begin_layout Standard
58367 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
58368 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
58369 manuals of the applications.
58372 \begin_layout Description
58374 \begin_inset space ~
58377 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
58378 \begin_inset space ~
58382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58384 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
58391 \begin_layout Description
58393 \begin_inset space ~
58396 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
58397 \begin_inset space ~
58401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58403 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
58410 \begin_layout Description
58412 \begin_inset space ~
58415 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
58416 \begin_inset space ~
58420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58422 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
58429 \begin_layout Description
58435 \begin_inset space ~
58438 command Command for the program
58440 Check\SpecialChar TeX
58443 that is described in the section
58445 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
58450 Additional Features
58455 \begin_layout Standard
58456 There are additionally the following options:
58459 \begin_layout Description
58461 \begin_inset space ~
58465 \begin_inset space ~
58469 \begin_inset space ~
58473 \begin_inset space ~
58478 \begin_inset space ~
58481 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
58482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58499 to separate folders.
58500 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
58502 \begin_inset Index idx
58507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58514 \begin_inset Index idx
58519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58521 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58538 \begin_layout Description
58540 \begin_inset space ~
58544 \begin_inset space ~
58548 \begin_inset space ~
58552 \begin_inset space ~
58556 \begin_inset space ~
58560 \begin_inset space ~
58563 changes Removes all manually set
58569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58570 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58572 \begin_inset space ~
58577 dialog when changing the document class.
58580 \begin_layout Section
58582 \begin_inset space ~
58586 \begin_inset Index idx
58591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58600 \begin_layout Subsection
58602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58604 name "subsec:Converters"
58609 \begin_inset Index idx
58614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58623 \begin_layout Standard
58624 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
58625 from one format to another.
58626 You can modify converters or create new ones.
58627 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
58634 \begin_inset space ~
58639 field and press the
58644 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
58648 \begin_inset space ~
58653 drop-down list, modify the
58657 field and press the
58664 \begin_layout Standard
58667 Converter File Cache
58673 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
58675 Maximum Age (in days
58678 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
58679 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
58682 \begin_layout Standard
58683 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
58684 definition, is described in the section
58695 \begin_layout Subsection
58697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58699 name "sec:File-Formats"
58704 \begin_inset Index idx
58709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58716 \begin_inset Index idx
58721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58730 \begin_layout Standard
58731 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
58741 programs that should be used for certain formats.
58744 \begin_layout Standard
58745 You can also define the
58747 Default output format
58749 that is used when you use
58751 View, Update, View Master Document
58755 Update Master Document
58761 menu or the toolbar.
58764 \begin_layout Standard
58765 More about formats and their options is described in the section
58776 \begin_layout Standard
58777 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
58779 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
58780 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
58781 This is done by specifying a
58786 More about this is described in the section
58797 \begin_layout Chapter
58798 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
58800 \begin_inset Index idx
58805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58814 name "chap:Units-available-in"
58821 \begin_layout Standard
58823 \begin_inset space ~
58827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58829 reference "tab:Units"
58833 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
58834 and used in this documentation.
58837 \begin_layout Standard
58838 \begin_inset Float table
58845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58846 \begin_inset Caption Standard
58848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58864 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58872 \begin_inset Tabular
58873 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
58874 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
58875 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
58876 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
58877 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
58879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
58900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
58938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
58975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
58995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59030 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
59034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59301 scaled point (65536
59302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59369 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
59374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59493 % of original image width
59498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
59552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
59561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59582 \begin_layout Standard
59583 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
59586 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
59593 \begin_layout Bibliography
59594 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59595 LatexCommand bibitem
59602 The \SpecialChar LyX
59604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59607 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
59613 \begin_inset Newline newline
59617 \begin_inset Flex URL
59620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59622 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
59630 \begin_layout Bibliography
59631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59632 LatexCommand bibitem
59633 key "latexcompanion"
59638 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
59640 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
59641 Companion Second Edition.
59644 Addison-Wesley, 2004
59647 \begin_layout Bibliography
59648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59649 LatexCommand bibitem
59655 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
59658 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
59662 Addison-Wesley, 2003
59665 \begin_layout Bibliography
59666 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59667 LatexCommand bibitem
59676 : A Document Preparation System.
59679 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
59682 \begin_layout Bibliography
59683 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59684 LatexCommand bibitem
59694 The \SpecialChar TeX
59698 Addison-Wesley, 1984
59701 \begin_layout Bibliography
59702 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59703 LatexCommand bibitem
59709 The \SpecialChar TeX
59711 \begin_inset Newline newline
59715 \begin_inset Flex URL
59718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59720 https://ctan.org/topic
59728 \begin_layout Bibliography
59729 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59730 LatexCommand bibitem
59736 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
59738 \begin_inset Newline newline
59742 \begin_inset Flex URL
59745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59747 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
59755 \begin_layout Bibliography
59756 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59757 LatexCommand bibitem
59764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59766 name "Documentation"
59767 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
59774 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59778 \begin_inset Newline newline
59782 \begin_inset Flex URL
59785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59787 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
59795 \begin_layout Bibliography
59796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59797 LatexCommand bibitem
59804 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59806 name "Documentation"
59807 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
59812 how to use the program
59814 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59818 \begin_inset Newline newline
59822 \begin_inset Flex URL
59825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59827 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
59835 \begin_layout Bibliography
59836 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59837 LatexCommand bibitem
59844 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59846 name "Documentation"
59847 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
59852 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59858 \begin_inset Index idx
59863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59866 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59881 \begin_inset Newline newline
59885 \begin_inset Flex URL
59888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59890 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
59898 \begin_layout Bibliography
59899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59900 LatexCommand bibitem
59907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59909 name "Documentation"
59910 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
59915 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59921 \begin_inset Index idx
59926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59929 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59944 \begin_inset Newline newline
59948 \begin_inset Flex URL
59951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59953 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
59961 \begin_layout Bibliography
59962 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59963 LatexCommand bibitem
59970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59972 name "Documentation"
59973 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
59983 \begin_inset Newline newline
59987 \begin_inset Flex URL
59990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59992 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
60000 \begin_layout Bibliography
60001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60002 LatexCommand bibitem
60003 key "makeindex-man"
60009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60012 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
60022 \begin_inset Newline newline
60026 \begin_inset Flex URL
60029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60031 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
60037 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
60041 \begin_layout Bibliography
60043 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
60044 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60045 LatexCommand bibitem
60052 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60054 name "Documentation"
60055 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
60065 \begin_inset Newline newline
60069 \begin_inset Flex URL
60072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60074 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
60076 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
60088 \begin_layout Bibliography
60089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60090 LatexCommand bibitem
60097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60099 name "Documentation"
60100 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
60110 \begin_inset Newline newline
60114 \begin_inset Flex URL
60117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60119 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
60127 \begin_layout Bibliography
60128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60129 LatexCommand bibitem
60136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60138 name "Documentation"
60139 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
60144 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
60146 \begin_inset Newline newline
60150 \begin_inset Flex URL
60153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60155 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
60163 \begin_layout Bibliography
60164 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60165 LatexCommand bibitem
60172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60174 name "Documentation"
60175 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
60180 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60186 \begin_inset Index idx
60191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60194 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60209 \begin_inset Newline newline
60213 \begin_inset Flex URL
60216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60218 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
60226 \begin_layout Bibliography
60227 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60228 LatexCommand bibitem
60235 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60237 name "Documentation"
60238 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
60243 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60249 \begin_inset Index idx
60254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60257 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60272 \begin_inset Newline newline
60276 \begin_inset Flex URL
60279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60281 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
60289 \begin_layout Bibliography
60290 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60291 LatexCommand bibitem
60298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60300 name "Documentation"
60301 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
60306 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60312 \begin_inset Index idx
60317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60320 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60335 \begin_inset Newline newline
60339 \begin_inset Flex URL
60342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60344 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
60352 \begin_layout Bibliography
60353 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60354 LatexCommand bibitem
60361 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60363 name "Documentation"
60364 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
60369 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60375 \begin_inset Index idx
60380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60383 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60398 \begin_inset Newline newline
60402 \begin_inset Flex URL
60405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60407 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
60415 \begin_layout Bibliography
60416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60417 LatexCommand bibitem
60424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60426 name "Documentation"
60427 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
60432 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60438 \begin_inset Index idx
60443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60461 \begin_inset Newline newline
60465 \begin_inset Flex URL
60468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60470 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
60478 \begin_layout Bibliography
60479 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60480 LatexCommand bibitem
60487 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60489 name "Documentation"
60490 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
60495 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60501 \begin_inset Index idx
60506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60509 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60524 \begin_inset Newline newline
60528 \begin_inset Flex URL
60531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60533 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
60541 \begin_layout Bibliography
60542 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60543 LatexCommand bibitem
60550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60552 name "Documentation"
60553 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
60558 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60564 \begin_inset Index idx
60569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60572 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60587 \begin_inset Newline newline
60591 \begin_inset Flex URL
60594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60596 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
60604 \begin_layout Bibliography
60605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60606 LatexCommand bibitem
60613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60615 name "Documentation"
60616 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
60621 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60627 \begin_inset Index idx
60632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60635 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60650 \begin_inset Newline newline
60654 \begin_inset Flex URL
60657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60659 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
60667 \begin_layout Bibliography
60668 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60669 LatexCommand bibitem
60676 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60679 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
60684 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60686 \begin_inset Newline newline
60690 \begin_inset Flex URL
60693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60695 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
60703 \begin_layout Bibliography
60704 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60705 LatexCommand bibitem
60712 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60715 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
60720 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60722 \begin_inset Newline newline
60726 \begin_inset Flex URL
60729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60731 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
60739 \begin_layout Bibliography
60740 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60741 LatexCommand bibitem
60748 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60751 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
60756 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60757 for Cyrillic languages:
60758 \begin_inset Newline newline
60762 \begin_inset Flex URL
60765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60767 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
60775 \begin_layout Bibliography
60776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60777 LatexCommand bibitem
60784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60787 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
60792 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60794 \begin_inset Newline newline
60798 \begin_inset Flex URL
60801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60803 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
60811 \begin_layout Bibliography
60812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60813 LatexCommand bibitem
60820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60823 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
60828 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60830 \begin_inset Newline newline
60834 \begin_inset Flex URL
60837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60839 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
60847 \begin_layout Bibliography
60848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
60849 LatexCommand bibitem
60856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60859 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
60864 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
60866 \begin_inset Newline newline
60870 \begin_inset Flex URL
60873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60875 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
60883 \begin_layout Standard
60884 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
60891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60918 \begin_inset Note Note
60921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60928 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
60929 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
60930 bibliography is the second one:
60938 \begin_layout Standard
60939 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
60940 LatexCommand bibtex
60941 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
60942 options "biblio/alphadin"
60949 \begin_layout Standard
60950 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
60954 \begin_layout Standard
60958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60964 pagedeclaration}[1]{
60967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60973 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
60981 \begin_inset Note Note
60984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60985 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
60986 \begin_inset space ~
60990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60992 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
61004 \begin_layout Standard
61005 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
61006 LatexCommand printnomenclature
61012 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
61013 LatexCommand printindex